HP Hewlett Packard All in One Printer M9050 MFP User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HP LaserJet M9040/M9050 MFP  
User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copyright information  
© 2008 Copyright Hewlett-Packard  
Development Company, L.P.  
Reproduction, adaptation or translation  
without prior written permission is prohibited,  
except as allowed under the copyright laws.  
The information contained herein is subject  
to change without notice.  
The only warranties for HP products and  
services are set forth in the express warranty  
statements accompanying such products  
and services. Nothing herein should be  
construed as constituting an additional  
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical  
or editorial errors or omissions contained  
herein.  
Part number: CC395-90926  
Edition 1, 04/2008  
Trademark credits  
Microsoft® and Windows® are  
U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation.  
PostScript® is a registered trademark of  
Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR  
logo® are U.S. registered marks of the United  
States Environmental Protection Agency.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
2 Control panel  
ENWW  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Software for Windows  
4 Use the product with Macintosh  
iv  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Paper and print media  
7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Copy  
9 Scan and send to e-mail  
vi  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Fax  
11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 Problem solve  
viii  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Order directly through the embedded Web server (for printers that are connected to a  
network) ........................................................................................................................... 240  
Appendix B Service and support  
Appendix C Specifications  
Appendix D Regulatory information  
x
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xii  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Product Basics  
ENWW  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Product introduction  
Figure 1-1 HP LaserJet M9040 MFP and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP  
The HP LaserJet M9040 MFP and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP come standard with the following items:  
100-sheet multipurpose input tray (tray 1)  
Two 500-sheet input trays  
One 2,000-sheet input tray  
Automatic document feeder (ADF)  
HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100/1000Base-TX network (Gigabit  
support)  
384 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)  
Duplexer  
Hard drive  
Output device  
2
Chapter 1 Product Basics  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Product features  
The HP LaserJet M9040 MFP and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP are designed to be shared by a workgroup.  
The MFP is a standalone copier that does not require connection to a computer. With the exception of  
network printing, you can select all functions at the MFP control panel.  
Functions  
Two-sided copying and printing  
Image modification  
Color digital sending  
Black-and-white printing and copying  
Wide-format printing  
Document finishing  
Speed and throughput  
50 images per minute (ipm) when scanning and printing on letter-size or International Standards  
Organization (ISO) A4-size paper (HP LaserJet M9050 MFP only)  
40 ipm when scanning and printing on letter-size or ISO A4-size paper (HP LaserJet M9040 MFP  
only)  
25% to 400% scalability when using the scanner glass  
25% to 200% scalability when using the automatic document feeder (ADF)  
Transmit Once, Raster Image Processing (RIP) ONCE technology  
Eight-seconds to first page  
Duty cycle of up to 300,000 images per month  
533 megahertz (MHz) microprocessor  
Resolution  
600 dots per inch (dpi) with Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)  
FastRes 1200 provides 1200 dpi quality at full speed  
Up to 220 levels of gray  
Memory  
384 megabytes (MB) of random-access memory (RAM), expandable to 512 MB by using industry  
standard 100-pin double data rate dual inline memory modules (DDR DIMMs)  
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) that automatically compresses data to use RAM more  
efficiently  
ENWW  
Product features  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
User interface  
Graphical display on control panel  
Embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (for network-connected  
products)  
HP Toolbox software to provide MFP status and alerts and print internal information pages  
Language and fonts  
HP Printer Command Language (PCL) 6  
HP PCL 5e for compatibility  
Printer Management Language  
80 scalable TrueType typefaces  
HP postscript 3 emulation  
Copying and sending  
Modes for text, graphics, and mixed text and graphics formats  
A job-interrupt feature (at copy boundaries)  
Multiple pages per sheet  
Operator attendance animations (for example, jam recovery)  
The ability to copy books  
E-mail compatibility  
A sleep feature that saves energy  
One-pass duplex scanning  
Print cartridge  
No-shake cartridge design  
Authentic HP print cartridge detection  
Automatic seal tab removal  
Paper-handling  
Input  
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies, labels, and  
envelopes. Holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 10 envelopes.  
Trays 2 and 3: Two 500-sheet trays. These trays automatically detect standard paper sizes  
up to 11 x 17/A3 and allow printing on custom-size paper.  
Tray 4 (2000-sheet input tray): This tray automatically detects standard paper sizes up to  
11 x 17/A3 and allows printing on custom-size paper.  
4
Chapter 1 Product Basics  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF): Holds up to 100 sheets of Letter- or A4-size paper or 50  
sheets of 11 x 17- or A3-size paper.  
Duplex printing: Provides two-sided printing (printing both sides of the paper).  
Output  
The MFP includes one of the following output choices.  
3000-sheet stacker: Stacks up to 3,000 sheets of paper.  
Upper bin (face-up): Holds up to 100 sheets of paper.  
Lower bin (face-down): Holds up to 3,000 sheets of paper. The output bins are part of the  
output device.  
3000-sheet stapler/stacker: Provides multiposition stapling for up to 50 sheets of paper per  
job, or a maximum job height of 5 mm (0.2 inch).  
Upper bin (face-up): Holds up to 100 sheets of paper.  
Lower bin (face-down): Holds up to 3,000 sheets of paper. The output bins are part of the  
output device.  
Multifunction finisher: Provides 1,000 sheets of stacking capacity, stapling for as many as  
50 sheets of paper per document, plus folding and saddle stitching of booklets that contain  
up to 10 sheets of paper.  
Upper bin (face-up and face-down): Holds up to 1,000 sheets of paper.  
Lower booklet bin: Holds up to 50 booklets.  
8-bin mailbox: A stacker, collator, or job separator that also provides eight mailbox bins that  
can be assigned to individual users or workgroups for easy identification and retrieval. The 8-  
bin mailbox can stack up to 2,000 sheets of A4- or letter-size paper in all the bins.  
Upper bin (face-up): Holds up to 125 sheets of paper  
Bins 1 through 8 (face-down): Each holds up to 250 sheets of paper  
Connectivity  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 connection  
A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) connection (AUX) for attaching third-party copy-control  
solutions.  
HP JetDirect 635n IPv6/IPSec Print Server. Local area network (LAN)-connector (RJ-45) for the  
embedded print server  
Optional analog fax card  
Optional HP Jetdirect EIO print server cards  
HP JetDirect 625n gigabit Ethernet internal print server  
IPV6/IPSec  
ENWW  
Product features  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Environmental features  
Sleep setting saves energy (meets Energy Star® guidelines, Version 1.0 HP LaserJet M9050 MFP  
only)  
Firmware updates provide the ability to upgrade the MFP firmware. To download the latest  
and follow the onscreen instructions. To easily send firmware updates to multiple products, use  
the HP Web Jetadmin software (go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin).  
Internal hard disk can be used to store selected print jobs. It can support RIP ONCE technology,  
and can permanently store downloaded fonts and forms in the MFP. Unlike standard product  
memory, many items on the hard disk remain in the MFP even when the MFP is turned off. Fonts  
that are downloaded to the hard disk are available to all users of the MFP.  
Optional EIO hard disk accessory provides additional capacity for storing fonts and forms. The MFP  
does not use the EIO hard disk accessory for tasks such as RIP ONCE and stored jobs. The MFP  
uses the internal hard disk for these tasks. Both disks can be write-protected through software for  
additional security.  
Security features  
Foreign Interface Harness  
Secure Disk Erase  
Security lock  
Job retention  
Front-panel authentication  
6
Chapter 1 Product Basics  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Product walkaround  
Figure 1-2 Product walkaround  
1
Document-feeder cover  
Document feeder (ADF)  
Control panel with touchscreen graphical display  
Tray 1  
2
3
4
5
Right door  
6
Vertical transfer door  
Tray 4  
7
8
Tray 3  
9
Tray 2  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Left door (behind output device)  
Output device  
Front door  
Duplex printing accessory (inside the MFP)  
ADF output bin  
Left door  
Printer power cable  
Tray 4 power cable  
EIO slot 1  
Copy processor EIO card  
ENWW  
Product walkaround  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Output devices  
This MFP comes with a 3000-sheet stacker, a 3000-sheet stapler/stacker, a multifunction finisher, or  
an 8-bin mailbox.  
3,000-sheet stacker  
Stacks up to 3,000 sheets of A4- or letter-size paper  
Stacks up to 1,500 sheets of A3- or ledger-size paper  
Can offset jobs, or offset the first page of jobs  
The lower bin (face-down bin) is the default bin for all output jobs.  
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker  
Paper handling features  
Stacks up to 3,000 sheets A4- or letter-size paper  
Stacks up to 1,500 sheets of A3- or ledger-size paper  
Can offset jobs, or offset the first page of jobs  
The upper bin (face-up bin) is the default bin for all output jobs.  
Stapling information  
The 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker can staple documents that contain between two pages and 50 pages  
of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper, or equivalent 5 mm (0.2 inches). The pages must be 64 to 199 g/m2 (17 to 53  
lb) of all sizes that the MFP supports.  
Heavier media might have a stapling limit of fewer than 50 pages.  
Stapling will not be performed on less than two sheets or more than 50 though the MFP will copy  
or print the job.  
Stapling is usually selected in your software program or printer driver. See Change printer-driver settings  
for more information. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or driver.  
If the stapler cannot be selected in the program or printer driver, it can be selected through the MFP  
control panel. See Staple documents on page 104 for instructions.  
Multifunction finisher  
Paper handling features  
Stacks up to 1,000 sheets of A4- and letter-size paper or up to 500 sheets of A3- and 11 x 17-size  
paper  
Stacks up to 40 booklets of 5 sheets of A3- and ledger-size paper  
Can offset jobs  
Staples up to 50 sheets of paper per document of A4- and letter-size paper  
8
Chapter 1 Product Basics  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Staples up to 25 sheets of paper per document A3- and ledger-size paper  
Folds single pages  
Saddle-stitches and folds up to 40 booklets of 5 sheets stacked, or 20 booklets of 10 sheets  
stacked.  
Stapling information  
The finisher can staple documents that contain between two pages and 50 pages of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)  
A-4-or letter-size paper or 25 pages of A3- 11 x 17-size paper or equivalent to 5.5 mm (0.22 inches).  
The pages must be 64 to 199 g/m2 (17 to 53 lb) of all sizes supported by the MFP.  
Consider these additional points:  
The upper bin (stacker bin) can hold up to 1,000 sheets stacked (not stapled). The multifunction  
finisher can deliver jobs face up or face down to the upper bin.  
Heavier media might have a stapling limit of fewer than 50 pages.  
If the job that you want stapled contains only one sheet, or if it contains more than 50 sheets, the  
multifunction finisher delivers the job without staples.  
You can usually select the stapler in your software program or printer driver, although some options  
might be available only in the printer driver. See Change printer-driver settings for Windows  
on page 53 for more information. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or  
driver.  
If the stapler cannot be selected in the program or printer driver, it can be selected through the MFP  
control panel. See Staple documents on page 104 for instructions.  
Booklets  
You can gain access to the booklet feature in some software programs, such as desktop publishing  
programs. See the user guide that came with your program for information about making booklets.  
If you are using a program that does not support booklet making, you can create booklets by using the  
HP printer driver.  
NOTE: HP recommends that you use your program to prepare and preview your document for printing,  
and then use the HP printer driver to print and saddle stitch your booklet.  
Use the following steps to create a booklet by using the printer driver:  
Prepare your booklet: Arrange the pages on a sheet (called booklet imposition) to create a booklet.  
You can impose your booklet in your software program, or you can use the booklet-printing feature  
in printer driver.  
Add a cover: Add a cover to your booklet by selecting a different first page with a different paper  
type. You can also add a cover of the same paper type as your booklet. Booklet covers must be  
the same size as the rest of the sheets in the booklet. However, the cover can be a different weight  
from the rest of the booklet.  
Use saddle stitching: Paper must be fed into the MFP short edge first. The MFP prompts you for  
rotated paper. The multifunction finisher staples the center of your booklet (called saddle stitching).  
If your booklet contains only one sheet of paper, the multifunction finisher folds the sheet, but does  
not staple it. If the booklet contains more than one sheet of paper, the multifunction finisher staples  
the sheets, and then folds up to 10 sheets per booklet.  
ENWW  
Output devices  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The booklet-printing feature of the multifunction finisher supports the saddle stitch and fold feature for  
the following paper sizes:  
A3  
A4-Rotated (A4-R)*  
Letter-Rotated (Letter-R)*  
Legal  
Ledger  
See the HP Multifunction Finisher User Guide at www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/  
support/ljm9050mfp for more information about making booklets.  
* A4-R and Letter-R are A4- and letter-size paper that is rotated 90˚ in the source tray.  
8-bin mailbox  
Handles high-capacity output that increases the MFP output capacity to 2,000 sheets of standard  
media  
Uses the upper bin to provide 125 sheets of face-up stacking capacity  
Delivers printed jobs face-down to the eight face-down bins, and each bin provides 250 sheets of  
stacking capacity  
Offers stacking options in different operational modes: mailbox, stacker, job separator, and sorter/  
collator  
For more information about the 8-bin mailbox, see the use guide that came with the 8-bin mailbox.  
10 Chapter 1 Product Basics  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 Control panel  
ENWW  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use the control panel  
The control panel has a VGA touchscreen that provides access to all device functions. Use the buttons  
and numeric keypad to control jobs and the device status. The LEDs indicate overall device status.  
Control-panel layout  
The control panel includes a touchscreen graphical display, job-control buttons, a numeric keypad, and  
three light-emitting diode (LED) status lights.  
Figure 2-1 Control panel  
1
Attention light  
The Attention light indicates that the device has a condition that requires  
intervention. Examples include an empty paper tray or an error message  
on the touchscreen.  
2
3
Data light  
The Data light indicates that the device is receiving data.  
Ready light  
The Ready light indicates that the device is ready to begin processing any  
job.  
4
5
6
Brightness-adjustment dial  
Touchscreen graphical display  
Numeric keypad  
Roll the dial to control the brightness of the touchscreen.  
Use the touchscreen to open and set up all device functions.  
Allows you to type numeric values for number of copies required and other  
numeric values.  
7
Sleep button  
If the device is inactive for a long period of time, it automatically enters a  
sleep mode. To place the device into sleep mode or to reactivate the device,  
press the Sleep button.  
8
9
Reset button  
Stop button  
Resets the job settings to factory or user-defined default values.  
Stops the active job. While stopped, the control panel shows the options for  
the stopped job (for example, if you press the Stop button while the device  
is processing a print job, the control panel message prompts you to cancel  
or resume the print job).  
10  
Start button  
Begins a copy job, starts digital sending, or continues a job that has been  
interrupted.  
12 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Home screen  
The home screen provides access to the device features, and it indicates the current status of the device.  
NOTE: Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, the features that  
appear on the home screen can vary.  
Figure 2-2 Home screen  
1
Features  
Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, the features that appear  
in this area can include any of the following items:  
Copy  
Fax (Optional)  
E-mail  
Secondary E-mail  
Network Folder  
Job Storage  
Workflow  
Supplies Status  
Administration  
2
Device status line  
The status line provides information about the overall device status. Various buttons appear in  
this area, depending on the current status. For a description of each button that can appear in  
the status line, see Buttons on the touchscreen on page 14.  
3
4
5
6
Copy count  
Help button  
Scroll bar  
Sign Out  
The copy count box indicates the number of copies that the device is set to make.  
Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.  
Touch the up or down arrows on the scroll bar to see the complete list of available features.  
Touch Sign Out to sign out of the device if you have signed in for access to restricted features.  
After you sign out, the device restores all options to the default settings.  
7
8
Network Address  
Date and time  
Touch Network Address to find information about the network connection.  
The current date and time appear here. The system administrator can select the format that  
the device uses to show the date and time, for example 12-hour format or 24-hour format.  
ENWW  
Use the control panel 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Buttons on the touchscreen  
The status line on the touchscreen provides information about the status of the device. Various buttons  
can appear in this area. The following table describes each button.  
Home button. Touch the home button to go to the Home screen from any other screen.  
Start button. Touch the Start button to begin the action for the feature that you are using.  
NOTE: The name of this button changes for each feature. For example, in the Copy feature, the button  
is named Start Copy.  
Error button. The error button appears whenever the device has an error that requires attention before  
it can continue. Touch the error button to see a message that describes the error. The message also has  
instructions for solving the problem.  
Warning button. The warning button appears when the device has a problem but can continue  
functioning. Touch the warning button to see a message that describes the problem. The message also  
has instructions for solving the problem.  
Help button. Touch the help button to open the built-in online Help system. For more information, see  
Control-panel help system  
The device has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help system,  
touch the Help button ( ) in the upper-right corner of the screen.  
For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specific topics. You can  
browse through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu.  
For screens that contain settings for individual jobs, the Help opens to a topic that explains the options  
for that screen.  
If the device alerts you of an error or warning, touch the error ( ) or warning ( ) button to open a  
message that describes the problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem.  
14 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Use the Administration menu  
Use the administration menu to set up default device behavior and other global settings, such as the  
language and the format for date and time.  
NOTE: Menus can be locked by the administrator. Contact the administrator if a menu or menu item  
is not available.  
Navigate the Administration menu  
From the Home screen, touch Administration to open the menu structure. You might need to scroll to  
the bottom of the Home screen to see this feature.  
The Administration menu has several sub-menus, which are listed on the left side of the screen. Touch  
the name of a menu to expand the structure. A plus sign (+) next to a menu name means that it contains  
sub-menus. Continue opening the structure until you reach the option that you want to configure. To  
return to the previous level, touch Back.  
To exit the Administration menu, touch the Home button ( ) in the upper-left corner of the screen.  
The device has built-in Help that explains each of the features that are available through the menus.  
Help is available for many menus on the right-hand side of the touchscreen. Or, to open the global Help  
system, touch the Help button ( ) in the upper-right corner of the screen.  
The tables in the sections that follow indicate the overall structure of each menu.  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Information menu  
Administration > Information  
Use this menu to print information pages and reports that are stored internally on the device.  
Table 2-1 Information menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Configuration Page  
Administration Menu  
Map  
Print  
Shows the basic structure of the  
Administration menu and current  
administration settings.  
Configuration Page  
Print  
Print  
Print  
A set of configuration pages that show the  
current device settings.  
Supplies Status  
Page  
Shows the status of supplies such as  
cartridges, maintenance kit, and staples.  
Usage Page  
Shows information about the number of  
pages that have been printed on each paper  
type and size.  
File Directory  
Print  
A directory page that contains information for  
any mass-storage devices, such as flash  
drives, memory cards, or hard disks, that are  
installed in this device.  
Fax Reports (only  
available if the  
HP LaserJet Analog  
Fax Accessory 300 is  
installed)  
Fax Activity Log  
Fax Call Report  
Print  
Print  
Contains a list of the faxes that have been  
sent from or received by this device.  
Fax Call Report  
A detailed report of the last fax operation,  
either sent or received.  
Thumbnail on Report Yes  
No (default)  
Choose whether or not to include a thumbnail  
of the first page of the fax on the report.  
When to Print Report Never auto print  
Print after any fax job  
Print after fax send jobs  
Print after any fax error (default)  
Print after send errors only  
Print after receive errors only  
Billing Codes Report  
Print  
A list of billing codes that have been used for  
outgoing faxes. This report shows how many  
sent faxes were billed to each code.  
Blocked Fax List  
Speed Dial List  
Print  
Print  
Print  
Print  
A list of phone numbers that are blocked from  
sending faxes to this device.  
Shows the speed dials that have been set up  
for this device.  
Sample Pages/Fonts PCL Font List  
PS Font List  
A list of printer control language (PCL) fonts  
that are currently available on the device.  
A list of postscript fonts that are currently  
available on the device.  
16 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Default Job Options menu  
Administration > Default Job Options  
Use this menu to define the default job options for each function. If the user does not specify the job  
options when creating the job, the default options are used.  
The Default Job Options menu contains the following sub-menus:  
Default Options for Originals  
Default Copy Options  
Default Fax Options  
Default E-mail Options  
Default Send To Folder Options  
Default Print Options  
Default Options for Originals  
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Options for Originals  
NOTE: Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Table 2-2 Default Options for Originals menu  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
Paper Size  
Select a paper size from the list. Select the paper size that is most often used for copy or scan  
originals.  
Number of Sides  
Orientation  
1 (default)  
2
Select whether copy or scan originals are most often single-sided or  
double-sided.  
Portrait (default)  
Landscape  
Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan  
originals. Select Portrait if the short edge is at the top or select  
Landscape if the long edge is at the top.  
Optimize Text/Picture  
Image Adjustment  
Manually Adjust (default)  
Text  
Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of original.  
You can optimize the output for text, pictures, or a mixture.  
If you select Manually Adjust, you can specify the mix of text and  
pictures that will most often be used.  
Printed Picture  
Darkness  
Use this setting to optimize the output for darker or lighter originals  
that you scan or copy.  
Background Cleanup  
Increase the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint images  
from the background or to remove a light background color.  
Sharpness  
Normal  
Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image.  
Heavy Originals  
This setting is important for jobs that use the ADF. Changing this  
setting adjusts the tension on heavy paper as it moves through the  
scanning area. It can affect output quality for papers that weigh more  
than 100 g/m2.  
Heavy Paper  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Default Copy Options  
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Copy Options  
NOTE: Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Table 2-3 Default Copy Options menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Number of Copies  
Type the number of  
copies. The factory  
default setting is 1.  
Set the default number of copies for a copy job.  
Number of Sides  
Staple/Collate  
1 (default)  
2
Set the default number of sides for copies.  
Staple  
None (default)  
Staple options  
Off  
Set up options for stapling and collating sets of copies.  
When you make multiple copies of a document,  
collating places the pages in the correct order, one set  
at a time, rather than placing all copies of each page  
next to each other.  
Collate  
On (default)  
Bin numbers/name  
Output Bin  
Select the default output bin, if applicable, for copies.  
Edge-To-Edge  
Normal (recommended)  
(default)  
If the original document is printed close to the edges,  
use the Edge-To-Edge feature to avoid shadows that  
can appear along the edges. Combine this feature with  
the Reduce/Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire  
page is printed on the copies.  
Edge-To-Edge Output  
Auto Include Margins  
Off (default)  
On  
Select this feature to ensure that the entire image  
appears on the copy, including any content that is close  
to the edges. If necessary, the device shrinks the image  
slightly, depending on the size of the printable area on  
the paper.  
18 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Default Fax Options  
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Fax Options  
NOTE: This menu is only available if the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 is installed.  
Table 2-4 Fax Send menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Resolution  
Standard (100x200dpi)  
(default)  
Set the resolution for sent documents. Higher  
resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so  
they show more detail. Lower resolution images have  
fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the file  
size is smaller.  
Fine (200x200dpi)  
Superfine (300x300dpi)  
Prepend (default)  
Overlay  
Fax Header  
Select the position of the fax header on the page.  
Select Prepend to print the fax header above the fax  
content and move the fax content down on the page.  
Select Overlay to print the fax header over the top of  
the fax contents without moving the contents down.  
Using Overlay could prevent a single-page fax from  
flowing onto another page.  
Table 2-5 Fax Receive menu  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
Fax Forwarding  
Fax Forwarding  
Change PIN  
To forward received faxes to another fax device, select Fax  
Forwarding and Custom. Then type the number of the other fax  
device into the Forward to Number field. When you select this menu  
item for the first time, you are prompted to set up a PIN. Type that  
PIN every time you use this menu. This is the same PIN that is used  
to access the Fax Printing menu. This PIN is exactly four digits.  
Stamp Received Faxes  
Fit to Page  
Enabled  
Add the date, time, senders phone number, and page number to each  
page of the faxes that this device receives.  
Disabled (default)  
Enabled (default)  
Disabled  
Shrink faxes that are larger than Letter-size or A4-size so that they  
can fit onto a Letter-size or A4-size page. If it this feature set to  
Disabled, faxes larger than Letter or A4 will flow across multiple  
pages.  
Fax Paper Tray  
Output Bin  
Select Automatic or a specific  
tray.  
Select the tray that holds the size and type of paper that you want to  
use for incoming faxes.  
<Binname>  
Select the default output bin, if applicable, to use for faxes.  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default E-mail Options  
Administration > Default Job Options > Default E-mail Options  
Use this menu to set default options for e-mails that are sent from the device.  
NOTE: Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
Document File Type  
PDF (default)  
JPEG  
Choose the file format for the e-mail.  
TIFF  
M-TIFF  
Output Quality  
Resolution  
High (large file)  
Medium (default)  
Low (small file)  
300 DPI  
Choosing higher quality for output increases the size of the  
output file.  
Use this feature to select the resolution. Use a lower setting to  
create smaller files.  
200 DPI  
150 DPI (default)  
75 DPI  
Color/Black  
Color scan (default)  
Black/white scan  
TIFF 6.0 (default)  
TIFF (Post 6.0)  
Specify whether the e-mail will be in black or in color.  
TIFF Version  
Use this feature to specify the TIFF version to use when saving  
scanned files.  
20 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Send to Folder Options  
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Send to Folder Options  
Use this menu to set default options for scan jobs sent to the computer.  
NOTE: Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
Color/Black  
Color scan  
Specify whether the file will be in black or in color.  
Black/white scan (default)  
PDF (default)  
M-TIFF  
Document File Type  
Choose the file format for the file.  
TIFF  
JPEG  
TIFF Version  
TIFF 6.0 (default)  
TIFF (post 6.0)  
High (large file)  
Medium (default)  
Low (small file)  
75 DPI  
Use this feature to specify the TIFF version to use when saving  
scanned files.  
Output Quality  
Choosing higher quality for output increases the size of the  
output file.  
Resolution  
Use this feature to select the resolution. Use a lower setting to  
create smaller files.  
150 DPI (default)  
200 DPI  
300 DPI  
400 DPI  
600 DPI  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Print Options  
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Print Options  
Use this menu to set default options for jobs that are sent from a computer.  
NOTE: Values shown with “(default)” are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Table 2-6 Default Print Options menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Copies Per Job  
Type a value.  
Use this feature to set the default  
number of copies for print jobs.  
Default Paper Size  
(List of supported sizes.)  
Millimeters  
Choose a paper size.  
Default Custom Paper  
Size  
Unit of measure  
Configure the default paper size that is  
used when the user selects Custom as  
the paper size for a print job.  
Inches  
X Dimension  
Y Dimension  
Configure the width measurement for  
the Default Custom Paper Size.  
Configure the height measurement for  
the Default Custom Paper Size.  
Output Bin  
Print Sides  
<Binname>  
Select the default output bin for print  
jobs.  
1-sided (default)  
2-sided  
Use this feature to select whether print  
jobs should be single-sided or double-  
sided by default.  
2-Sided Format  
Long edge  
Short edge  
Use this feature to configure the default  
style for 2-sided print jobs. If Long edge  
is selected, the back side of the page is  
printed the right way up. This option is for  
print jobs that are bound along the left  
edge. If Short edge is selected, the back  
side of the page is printed upside-down.  
This option is for print jobs that are  
bound along the top edge.  
22 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Time/Scheduling menu  
Administration > Time/Scheduling  
Use this menu to set options for setting the time and for setting the device to enter and exit sleep mode.  
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Table 2-7 Time/Scheduling menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Date/Time  
Date Format  
YYYY/MMM/DD  
(default)  
Use this feature to set the current date and  
time, and to set the date format and time  
format that are used to time-stamp outgoing  
faxes.  
MMM/DD/YYYY  
DD/MMM/YYYY  
Date  
Month  
Day  
Year  
Time Format  
Time  
12 hour (AM/PM)  
(default)  
24 hour  
Hour  
Minute  
AM  
PM  
Time Zone  
Use this feature to set the time zone for your  
location and to select whether the device  
should automatically adjust for daylight-  
saving time.  
Sleep Delay  
1 Minute  
Use this feature to select the time interval that  
the device should remain inactive before  
entering Sleep Mode.  
20 minutes  
30 minutes  
45 minutes (default)  
1 hour (60 minutes)  
90 minutes  
2 hours  
4 hours  
Wake Time  
Monday  
Off (default)  
Custom  
Select Custom to set a wake time for each  
day of the week. The device exits sleep mode  
according to this schedule. Using a sleep  
schedule helps conserve energy and  
prepares the device for use so that users do  
not have to wait for it to warm up.  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Table 2-7 Time/Scheduling menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Friday  
Saturday  
Sunday  
Sleep Time  
Monday  
Off (default)  
Custom  
Select Custom to set a sleep time for each  
day of the week. The device is put in sleep  
mode according to this schedule. Using a  
sleep schedule helps conserve energy.  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
Sunday  
Fax Printing (only  
available if the  
HP LaserJet Analog  
Fax Accessory 300 is  
installed)  
Fax Printing Mode  
Store all received  
faxes  
If you have concerns about the security of  
private faxes, use this feature to store faxes  
rather than having them automatically print by  
creating a printing schedule.  
Print all received  
faxes (default)  
For the fax printing schedule, the control  
panel prompts you to select days and times  
to print faxes.  
Use Fax Printing  
Schedule  
Change PIN  
Select Change PIN to change the PIN  
number that users must provide to access the  
Fax Printing menu and the Fax Forwarding  
menu. This PIN is exactly four digits.  
24 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Management menu  
Administration > Management  
Use this menu to set up global device-management options.  
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Table 2-8 Management menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Network Address Button  
Display (default)  
Hide  
Select this option to display the Network Address  
button on the control-panel home screen.  
Stored Job Management Quick Copy Job Storage  
Limit  
Select the maximum  
number of jobs to store  
Use this menu to view and manage any jobs that are  
stored on the device.  
Quick Copy Job Held  
Timeout  
Off (default)  
1 Hour  
4 hours  
1 Day  
1 Week  
Sleep mode  
Disable  
Use this feature to customize the sleep mode settings  
for this device.  
Use Sleep Delay (default)  
Select Use Sleep Delay to set the device to enter sleep  
mode after the delay that is specified in the Time/  
Scheduling menu.  
Manage Supplies  
Replace black cartridge  
Stop at low  
Use this menu to carry out administrative supply  
management tasks such as changing the threshold  
when supplies should be ordered.  
Stop at out  
Override at out (default)  
Supply Low/Order  
Threshold  
Select a value in the  
range.  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Initial Setup menu  
Administration > Initial Setup  
The Initial Setup menu contains the sub-menus shown:  
Networking and I/O menu  
Fax Setup menu  
E-mail Setup menu  
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Networking and I/O  
Administration > Initial Setup > Networking and I/O  
Table 2-9 Networking and I/O  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
I/O Timeout  
Select a value in the  
I/O timeout refers to the elapsed time before a print job  
range. The factory default fails. If the stream of data that the device receives for  
setting is 15 seconds.  
a print job gets interrupted, this setting indicates how  
long the device will wait before it reports that the job  
has failed.  
Embedded Jetdirect  
EIO <X> Jetdirect  
See Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus on page 26 for the list of options.  
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
TCP/IP  
Enable  
Off: Disable the TCP/IP protocol.  
On (default): Enable the TCP/IP protocol.  
Host Name  
An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to  
identify the device. This name is listed on the  
HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name  
is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the  
LAN hardware (MAC) address.  
IPV4 Settings  
Config Method  
Specifies the method by which TCP/IPv4 parameters  
for the HP Jetdirect print server will be configured.  
Bootp: Use BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) for automatic  
configuration from a BootP server.  
DHCP (Default): Use DHCP (Dynamic Host  
Configuration Protocol) for automatic configuration  
from a DHCPv4 server. If selected and a DHCP lease  
exists, DHCP Release and DHCP Renew menus are  
available to set DHCP lease options.  
Auto IP: Use automatic link-local IPv4 addressing. An  
address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned  
automatically.  
26 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
Manual: Use the Manual Settings menu to configure  
TCP/IPv4 parameters.  
DHCP Release  
This menu appears if Config Method was set to  
DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.  
No (default): The current DHCP lease is saved.  
Yes: Release the current IP address. Note that the  
printer will lose network connectivity until it reboots at  
which point it may have a new address.  
DHCP Renew  
This menu appears if Config Method was set to  
DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.  
No (default): The print server does not request to renew  
the DHCP lease.  
Yes: The print server renews the lease on it's IP  
address.  
Manual Settings  
(Available only if Config Method is set to Manual)  
Configure parameters directly from the printer control  
panel:  
IP Address: The unique IP address of the printer  
(n.n.n.n), where n is a value from 0 to 255.  
Subnet Mask: The subnet mask for the printer  
(m.m.m.m), where m is a value from 0 to 255.  
Syslog Server: The IP address of the syslog server  
used to receive and log syslog messages.  
Default Gateway: The IP address of the gateway or  
router used for communications with other networks.  
Idle Timeout: The time period, in seconds, after which  
an idle TCP print data connection is closed (default is  
270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout).  
Default IP  
Specify the IP address to default to when the print  
server is unable to obtain an IP address from the  
network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for  
example, when manually configured to use BootP or  
DHCP).  
Auto IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set.  
Legacy: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent  
with older HP Jetdirect devices.  
Primary DNS  
Secondary DNS  
Enable  
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary DNS  
Server.  
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary  
Domain Name System (DNS) Server.  
IPV6 Settings  
Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the  
print server.  
Off (default): IPv6 is disabled.  
On: IPv6 is enabled.  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
Address  
Use this item to manually configure an IPv6 address.  
Manual Settings: Use the Manual Settings menu to  
enable and manually configure a TCP/ IPv6 address.  
DHCPV6 Policy  
Router Specified (Default): The stateful auto-  
configuration method to be used by the print server is  
determined by a router. The router specifies whether  
the print server obtains its address, its configuration  
information, or both from a DHCPv6 server.  
Router Unavailable: If a router is not available, the print  
server should attempt to obtain its stateful  
configuration from a DHCPv6 server.  
Always: Whether or not a router is available, the print  
server always attempts to obtain its stateful  
configuration from a DHCPv6 server.  
Primary DNS  
Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a primary  
DNS server that the print server should use.  
Manual Settings  
Use this item to manually set IPv6 addresses on the  
print server.  
Enable: Select this item and choose On to enable  
manual configuration, or Off to disable manual  
configuration.  
Address: Use this item to type a 32 hexadecimal digit  
IPv6 node address that uses the colon hexadecimal  
syntax.  
Proxy Server  
Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded  
applications in the device. A proxy server is typically  
used by network clients for Internet access. It caches  
Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security,  
for those clients.  
To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or  
fully-qualified domain name. The name can be up to  
255 octets.  
For some networks, you may need to contact your  
Independent Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy  
server address.  
Proxy Port  
Type the port number used by the proxy server for  
client support. The port number identifies the port  
reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be  
a value from 0 to 65535.  
IPX/SPX  
Enable  
Off: Disable the IPX/SPX protocol.  
On (default): Enable the IPX/SPX protocol.  
Selects the frame-type setting for your network.  
Frame Type  
Auto (Default): Automatically sets and limits the frame  
type to the first one detected.  
EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, and EN_SNAP: Frame-  
type selections for Ethernet networks.  
28 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
A Talk  
Enable  
Off : Disable the AppleTalk protocol.  
On (default): Enable the AppleTalk protocol.  
Off : Disable the DLC/LLC protocol.  
DLC/LLC  
Security  
Enable  
On (default): Enable the DLC/LLC protocol.  
Print Sec Page  
Yes: Prints a page that contains the current security  
settings on the HP Jetdirect print server.  
No (default): A security settings page is not printed.  
Secure Web  
For configuration management, specify whether the  
embedded Web server will accept communications  
using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and  
HTTPS.  
HTTPS Required (Default): For secure, encrypted  
communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The  
print server will appear as a secure site.  
HTTP/HTTPS optional: Access using either HTTP or  
HTTPS is permitted.  
IPsec or Firewall  
Specify the IPsec or Firewall status on the print server.  
Keep: IPsec/Firewall status remains the same as  
currently configured.  
Disable (Default): IPsec/Firewall operation on the print  
server is disabled.  
Reset Security  
Specify whether the current security settings on the  
print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults.  
No (default): The current security settings are  
maintained.  
Yes: Security settings are reset to factory defaults.  
Diagnostics  
Embedded Test  
This menu provides tests to help diagnose network  
hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems.  
Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault  
is internal or external to the device. Use an embedded  
test to check hardware and communication paths on  
the print server. After you select and enable a test and  
set the execution time, you must select Execute to  
initiate the test.  
Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs  
continuously until either the device is turned off, or an  
error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed.  
LAN HW Test  
CAUTION: Running this embedded test will erase  
your TCP/IP configuration.  
This test performs an internal loopback test. An internal  
loopback test will send and receive packets only on the  
internal network hardware. There are no external  
transmissions on your network.  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.  
HTTP Test  
This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving  
predefined pages from the device, and tests the  
embedded Web server.  
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.  
SNMP Test  
This test checks operation of SNMP communications  
by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the device.  
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.  
Use this item to select all available embedded tests.  
Select All Tests  
Data Path Test  
Select Yes to choose all tests. Select No to select  
individual tests.  
This test helps to identify data path and corruption  
problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation device.  
It sends a predefined PS file to the device, However,  
the test is paperless; the file will not print.  
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.  
Execution Time [H]  
Use this item to specify the length of time (in hours) that  
an embedded test will be run. You can select a value  
from 1 to 60 hours. If you select zero (0), the test runs  
indefinitely until an error occurs or device is turned off.  
Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and Data Path  
tests is printed after the tests have completed.  
Execute  
No*: Do not initiate the selected tests.  
Yes: Initiate the selected tests.  
30 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
Ping Test  
This test is used to check network communications.  
This test sends link-level packets to a remote network  
host, then waits for an appropriate response. To run a  
ping test, set the following items:  
Dest Type  
Dest IP  
Specify whether the target device is an IPv4 or IPv6  
node.  
IPV4: Type the IPv4 address.  
IPV6: Type the IPv6 address.  
Packet Size  
Timeout  
Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to be sent to  
the remote host. The minimum is 64 (default) and the  
maximum is 2048.  
Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a  
response from the remote host. The default is 1 and  
the maximum is 100.  
Count  
Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this  
test. Select a value from 1 to 100. To configure the test  
to run continuously, select 0.  
Print Results  
If the ping test was not set for continuous operation,  
you can choose to print the test results. Select Yes to  
print results. If you select No (default), results are not  
printed.  
Execute  
Specify whether to initiate the ping test. Select Yes to  
initiate the test, or No to not run the test.  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
Ping Results  
Use this item to view the ping test status and results  
using the control panel display. You can select the  
following items:  
Packets Sent  
Packets Received  
Percent Lost  
RTT Min  
Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) sent to the  
remote host since the most recent test was initiated or  
completed.  
Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) receivedfrom  
the remote host since the most recent test was initiated  
or completed.  
Shows the percent of ping test packets that were sent  
with no response from the remote host since the most  
recent test was initiated or completed.  
Shows the minimum detected roundtrip- time (RTT),  
from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission  
and response.  
RTT Max  
Shows the maximum detected roundtrip- time (RTT),  
from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission  
and response.  
RTT Average  
Ping In Progress  
Refresh  
Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to  
4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and  
response.  
Shows whether a ping test is in progress. Yes indicates  
a test in progress, and No indicates that a test  
completed or was not run.  
When viewing the ping test results, this item updates  
the ping test data with current results. Select Yes to  
update the data, or No to maintain the existing data.  
However, a refresh automatically occurs when the  
menu times out or you manually return to the main  
menu.  
Link Speed  
The link speed and communication mode of the print  
server must match the network. The available settings  
depend on the device and installed print server. Select  
one of the following link configuration settings:  
CAUTION: If you change the link setting, network  
communications with the print server and network  
device might be lost.  
Auto (default): The print server uses auto-negotiation  
to configure itself with the highest link speed and  
communication mode allowed. If auto-negotiation fails,  
either 100TX HALF or 10TX HALF is set depending on  
the detected link speed of the hub/switch port. (A  
1000T half-duplex selection is not supported.)  
10T Half: 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation.  
10T Full: 10 Mbps, Full-duplex operation.  
100TX Half: 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.  
100TX Full: 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation.  
100TX Auto: Limits auto-negotiation to a maximum link  
speed of 100 Mbps.  
32 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2-10 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
1000TX Full: 1000 Mbps, full-duplex operation.  
Print Protocols  
Use this item to print a page that lists the configuration  
of the following protocols: IPX/SPX, Novell NetWare,  
AppleTalk, DLC/LLC.  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax Setup  
Administration > Initial Setup > Fax Setup  
NOTE: This menu is only available if the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 is installed.  
Table 2-11 Fax Setup menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Required Settings  
Country/Region  
(Countries/regions  
listed)  
Configure the settings that are legally  
required for outgoing faxes.  
Date/Time  
Fax Header  
Information  
Phone Number  
Company Name  
PC Fax Send  
Disabled  
Use this feature to enable or disable PC Fax  
Send. PC Fax Send enables users to send  
faxes through the device from their  
computers if they have the Send Fax driver  
installed.  
Enabled (default)  
34 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2-11 Fax Setup menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Off  
Description  
Fax Send Settings  
Fax Dial Volume  
Use this feature to set the volume of the tones  
that you hear while the device dials the fax  
number.  
Low (default)  
High  
Error Correction  
Mode  
Enabled (default)  
When Error Correction Mode is enabled and  
an error occurs during fax transmission, the  
device sends or receives the error portion  
again.  
Disabled  
JBIG Compression  
Enabled (default)  
Disabled  
JBIG compression reduces fax-transmission  
time, which can result in lower phone  
charges. However, using JBIG compression  
sometimes causes compatibility problems  
with older fax machines. If this occurs, turn off  
JBIG compression.  
Maximum Baud Rate  
Select a value from  
Use this feature to set the maximum baud  
the list. The default is rate for receiving faxes. This can be used as  
33.6K.  
a diagnostic tool for troubleshooting fax  
problems.  
TCF T.30 Delay  
Timer  
Default (default)  
Custom  
This setting should be left at the default value  
and only changed when directed by an HP  
technical support agent. Adjustment  
procedures associated with this setting are  
beyond the scope of this guide.  
TCF Extend  
Default (default)  
Custom  
This setting should be left at the default value  
and only changed when directed by an HP  
technical support agent. Adjustment  
procedures associated with this setting are  
beyond the scope of this guide.  
Dialing Mode  
Tone (default)  
Pulse  
Select whether the device should use tone or  
pulse dialing.  
Redial On Busy  
Redial On NoAnswer  
The range is between Type the number of times the device should  
0 and 9. The factory attempt to redial if the line is busy.  
default is 3 times.  
Never (default)  
Once  
Use this feature to specify the number of  
times the device should attempt to dial if the  
recipient fax number does not answer.  
Twice  
NOTE: Twice is available in locations other  
than the United States and Canada.  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 2-11 Fax Setup menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Redial Interval  
The range is between Use this feature to specify the number of  
1 and 5 minutes. The minutes between dialing attempts if the  
factory default is 5  
minutes.  
recipient number is busy or not answering.  
Detect Dial Tone  
Dialing Prefix  
Billing Codes  
Enabled  
Use this feature to specify whether the device  
should check for a dial tone before sending a  
fax.  
Disabled (default)  
Off (default)  
Custom  
Use this feature to specify a prefix number  
that must be dialed when sending faxes from  
the device.  
Off (default)  
Custom  
When billing codes are enabled, a prompt  
appears that asks the user to enter the billing  
code for an outgoing fax.  
The range is between 1 and 16 digits. The  
default is 1 digit.  
Fax Receive Settings Rings To Answer  
Ring Interval  
The range varies by Use this feature to specify the number of rings  
location. The factory that must occur before the fax modem  
default is 2 rings.  
Default (default)  
Custom  
answers.  
This setting is used to adjust for some PBX  
ring signals. Change this setting only when  
directed by an HP technical support agent.  
Ring Frequency  
Default (default)  
Custom  
This setting should be left at the default value  
and only changed when directed by an HP  
technical support agent. Adjustment  
procedures associated with this setting are  
beyond the scope of this guide.  
Ringer Volume  
Off  
Set the volume for the fax ring-tone.  
Low (default)  
High  
Blocked Fax  
Numbers  
Add Blocked  
Numbers  
Type the fax number Use this feature to add or delete numbers  
to add.  
from the blocked fax list. The blocked fax list  
can contain up to 30 numbers. When the  
device receives a call from one of the blocked  
fax numbers, it deletes the incoming fax. It  
also logs the blocked fax in the activity log  
along with job-accounting information.  
Remove Blocked  
Numbers  
Select a fax number  
to remove.  
Clear All Blocked  
Numbers  
No (default)  
Yes  
36 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-mail Setup  
Administration > Initial Setup > E-mail Setup  
Use this menu to enable the e-mail feature and to configure basic e-mail settings.  
NOTE: To configure advanced e-mail settings, use the embedded Web server. For more information,  
Table 2-12 E-mail Setup menu  
Menu item  
Values  
On (default)  
Off  
Description  
Address Validation  
This option enables the device to check e-mail syntax when you type  
an e-mail address. Valid e-mail addresses require the "@" sign and  
a ".".  
Find Send Gateways  
SMTP Gateway  
Search the network for SMTP gateways that the device can use to  
send e-mail.  
Enter a value.  
Specify the IP address of the SMTP gateway that is used to send e-  
mail from the device.  
Test Send Gateway  
Test the configured SMTP gateway to see if it is functional.  
Send Setup menu  
Administration > Initial Setup > Send Setup  
Table 2-13 Send Setup menu  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
Replicate MFP  
Enter a value (IP Address).  
Copy the local Send settings from one device to another.  
Allow Transfer to New DSS  
Off  
Use this feature to allow the transfer of the device from one HP Digital  
Sending Software (DSS) server to another.  
On (default)  
HP DSS is a software package that handles digitalsending tasks such  
as faxing, e-mail, and sending a scanned document to a network  
folder.  
Allow Use of Digital Send Service Off  
On (default)  
This feature allows you to configure the device for use with an  
HP Digital Sending Software (DSS) server.  
Fax Number Confirmation  
Disable (default)  
Enable  
Enable fax number confirmation for fax numbers that are entered at  
the device control panel. When fax number confirmation is enabled,  
the fax number must be entered twice to ensure that it was entered  
correctly.  
Fax Number Speed Dial  
Matching  
Disable (default)  
Enable  
If this feature is enabled, the MFP tries to match any fax number  
entered with existing entries in the speed dial list. If a match is found,  
you can confirm the match and have the MFP complete the faxing  
action automatically.  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Device Behavior menu  
Administration > Device Behavior  
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Table 2-14 Device Behavior menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Language  
Select the language Use this feature to select a different language  
from the list.  
for control-panel messages. When you select  
a new language, the keyboard layout might  
also change.  
Key Press Sound  
Inactivity Timeout  
On (default)  
Off  
Use this feature to specify whether you hear  
a sound when you touch the screen or press  
buttons on the control panel.  
Type a value  
Use this feature to specify the amount of time  
between 10 and 300 that elapses between any activity on the  
seconds. The factory control panel and the device resetting to the  
default is 60  
seconds.  
default settings.  
Warning/Error  
Behavior  
Clearable Warnings  
Continuable Events  
On  
Use this feature to set the amount of time that  
a clearable warning appears on the control  
panel.  
Job (default)  
Auto continue (10  
seconds) (default)  
Use this option to configure the device  
behavior when the device encounters certain  
errors.  
Press OK to continue  
Jam Recovery  
Auto (default)  
Use this feature to configure how the device  
handles pages that are lost during a jam.  
On  
Off  
Tray Behavior  
Use Requested Tray  
Exclusively (default) Use this feature to control how the device  
handles jobs that have specified a specific  
First  
input tray.  
Manually Feed  
Prompt  
Always (default)  
Unless Loaded  
Use this feature to indicate whether a prompt  
should appear when the type or size for a job  
does not match the specified tray and the  
device pulls from the multipurpose tray  
instead.  
PS Defer Media  
Use Another Tray  
Size/Type Prompt  
Enabled (default)  
Disabled  
Use this feature to choose either the  
postscript (PS) or HP paper-handling model.  
Enabled (default)  
Disabled  
Use this feature to turn on or off the control-  
panel prompt to select another tray when the  
specified tray is empty.  
Display  
Use this feature to control whether the tray  
configuration message appears whenever a  
tray is opened or closed.  
Do not display  
(default)  
Duplex Blank Pages  
Auto (default)  
Yes  
Use this feature to control how the device  
handles two-sided jobs (duplexing).  
38 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Table 2-14 Device Behavior menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
[output device menu]  
Use this menu to set the finishing options for  
the installed output device.  
NOTE: This menu  
varies depending on  
the output device  
installed.  
General Copy  
Behavior  
Hold Off Print Job  
Hold Off Time  
Scan Ahead  
On  
Off  
Prevents print jobs from beginning to print  
while a walk-up user is setting up a job.  
Prevents non-copy print jobs from starting for  
a specified time after a copy job is completely  
printed.  
Enabled (default)  
Disabled  
Use this feature to turn on no-wait scanning.  
With Scan Ahead enabled, the pages in the  
original document are scanned to disk and  
held until the device becomes available.  
Auto Print Interrupt  
Enabled  
When this feature is enabled, copy jobs can  
interrupt print jobs that are set to print multiple  
copies.  
Disabled (Default)  
The copy job is inserted into the print queue  
at the end of one copy of the print job. After  
the copy job is complete, the device  
continues printing the remaining copies of the  
print job.  
Copy Interrupt  
Enabled  
When this feature is enabled, a copy job that  
is currently printing can be interrupted when  
a new copy job is started. You are prompted  
to confirm that you want to interrupt the  
current job.  
Disabled (Default)  
Alternative  
Letterhead Mode  
Off (default)  
On  
Enable this feature to load letterhead or  
preprinted paper into the tray the same way  
for all copy jobs, whether you are copying to  
one side of the sheet or to both sides of the  
sheet. When this option is selected, load the  
paper as you would for printing on both sides.  
The device speed slows to the speed  
required for printing on both sides.  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Table 2-14 Device Behavior menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
No  
Description  
General Printing  
Behavior  
Override A4/Letter  
Use this feature to print on letter-size paper  
when an A4 job is sent but no A4-size paper  
is loaded in the device (or to print on A4 paper  
when a letter-size job is sent but no letter-size  
paper is loaded). This option will also override  
A3 with ledger-size paper and ledger with A3-  
size paper.  
Yes (default)  
Manual Feed  
Enabled  
When this feature is enabled, the user can  
select manual feed from the control panel as  
the paper source for a job.  
Disabled (default)  
Enabled  
Edge-To-Edge  
Override  
Use the feature to turn the edge-to-edge  
mode on or off for all print jobs. This mode  
can be overridden inside a print job by an  
edge-to-edge PJL variable.  
Disabled (default)  
Courier Font  
Wide A4  
Regular (default)  
Dark  
Use this feature to select which version of the  
Courier font you want to use.  
Enabled  
Use this feature to change the printable area  
of A4-size paper. If you enable this option,  
eighty 10-pitch characters can be printed on  
a single line of A4 paper.  
Disabled (default)  
Print PS Errors  
Print PDF Errors  
Personality  
Enabled  
Use this feature to select whether a postscript  
(PS) error page is printed when the device  
encounters a PS error.  
Disabled (default)  
Enabled (default)  
Disabled  
Use this feature to select whether a PDF error  
page is printed when the device encounters  
a PDF error.  
Auto (default)  
PCL  
Select the printer language that the device  
should use.  
Normally you should not change the  
language. If you change the setting to a  
specific language, the device does not  
automatically switch from one language to  
another unless specific software commands  
are sent to the device.  
PDF  
PS  
40 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Table 2-14 Device Behavior menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
PCL  
Form Length  
Type a value  
PCL is a set of printer commands that  
Hewlett-Packard developed to provide  
access to printer features.  
between 5 and 128  
lines. The factory  
default is 60 lines.  
Orientation  
Portrait (default)  
Landscape  
Select the orientation that is most often used  
print jobs. Select Portrait if the short edge is  
at the top or select Landscape if the long edge  
is at the top.  
Font Source  
Font Number  
Select the source  
from the list.  
Use this feature to select the font source for  
the user-defined soft default font.  
Type the font  
Use this feature to specify the font number for  
number. The range is the user-soft default font using the source that  
between 0 and 999. is specified in the Font Source menu item.  
The factory default is The device assigns a number to each font  
0.  
and lists it on the PCL font list (available from  
the Administration menu).  
Font Pitch  
Type a value  
If Font Source and Font Number indicate a  
contour font, then use this feature to select a  
default pitch (for a fixed-spaced font).  
between 0.44 and  
99.99. The factory  
default is 10.00.  
Font Point Size  
Symbol Set  
Type a value  
If Font Source and Font Number indicate a  
contour font, then use this feature to select a  
default point size (for a proportional-spaced  
font).  
between 4.00 and  
999.75. The factory  
default is 12.00.  
PC-8 (default)  
Use this feature to select any one of several  
available symbol sets from the control panel.  
A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the  
characters in a font.  
(50 additional symbol  
sets from which to  
choose)  
Append CR to LF  
No (default)  
Yes  
Use this feature to configure whether a  
carriage return (CR) is appended to each line  
feed (LF) encountered in backwards-  
compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job  
control).  
Suppress Blank  
Pages  
No (default)  
Yes  
This option is for users who are generating  
their own PCL, which could include extra form  
feeds that would cause blank pages to be  
printed. When Yes is selected, form feeds are  
ignored if the page is blank.  
Media Source  
Mapping  
Standard (default)  
Classic  
Use this feature to select and maintain input  
trays by number when you are not using the  
device driver, or when the software program  
has no option for tray selection.  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Print Quality menu  
Administration > Print Quality  
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Table 2-15 Print Quality menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Set Registration  
Test Page  
Print (button)  
Print a test page for setting the registration. Follow the  
instructions that are printed on the page to adjust each  
tray.  
Source  
All trays  
Use Set Registration to shift the margin alignment to  
center the image on the page from top to bottom and  
from left to right. You can also align the image on the  
front with the image printed on the back.  
Tray <X>: <contents>  
Tray <X>: <contents>  
(choose a tray)  
Select the source input tray for printing the Set  
Registration page.  
Adjust Tray <X>  
Shift from -20 to 20 along Perform the alignment procedure for each tray.  
the X or Y axes. 0 is the  
When it creates an image, the device scans across the  
page from side to side as the sheet feeds from top to  
bottom into the device.  
default.  
Fuser Modes  
Standby Fuser Mode  
125° Celsius  
Off  
Set the temperature of the fuser when the MFP is in  
standby mode.  
<Paper Type>  
Restore Modes  
Configure the fuser mode associated with each media  
type.  
Restore (button)  
300  
Restore the fuser modes to the default settings.  
Use this feature to select the print resolution.  
Resolution  
600  
FastRes 1200 (default)  
ProRes 1200  
Off  
REt  
Enable Resolution Enhancement technology (REt),  
which produces print output with smooth angles,  
curves, and edges. All print resolutions, including  
FastRes 1200, benefit from REt.  
Light  
Medium (default)  
Dark  
Economode  
Enabled  
When Economode is enabled, the device prints with a  
reduced amount of toner per page; however, the print  
quality of the page is reduced.  
Disabled (default)  
Toner Density  
Choose from a range of 1 Lighten or darken the print on the page. 1 is the lightest  
to 5. 3 is the default.  
Normal (default)  
Slow  
and 5 is the darkest.  
Small Paper Mode  
Choose Slow to adjust the MFP for printing narrow  
media.  
42 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Table 2-15 Print Quality menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Calibration/Cleaning  
Create Cleaning Page  
Create (button)  
Generate a page for cleaning excess toner off the  
pressure roller in the fuser. The page has instructions  
that guide you through the cleaning process.  
Process Cleaning Page  
Process (button)  
Process the cleaning page that was created by using  
the Create Cleaning Page menu item. The process  
takes up to 2.5 minutes.  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting menu  
Administration > Troubleshooting  
NOTE: Many of the menu items under the Troubleshooting menu are for advanced troubleshooting  
purposes.  
Table 2-16 Troubleshooting menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Event Log  
Print  
This shows the event codes and their  
corresponding engine cycles on the control-  
panel display.  
Fax T.30 Trace (only Print T.30 Report  
available if the  
Print or configure the fax T.30 trace report. T.  
30 is the standard that specifies  
handshaking, protocols, and error correction  
between fax machines.  
When to Print Report  
Never auto print  
(default)  
HP LaserJet Analog  
Fax Accessory 300 is  
installed)  
Print after any fax job  
Print after fax send  
jobs  
Print after any fax  
error  
Print after send  
errors only  
Print after receive  
errors only  
Fax Transmit Signal  
Loss (only available if  
the HP LaserJet  
Analog Fax  
Accessory 300 is  
installed)  
A value between 0  
and 30. The default is signal loss. Do not modify this setting unless  
0.  
Set loss levels to compensate for phone-line  
requested to do so by an HP service  
representative because it could cause the fax  
to stop functioning.  
Fax V.34 (only  
available if the  
HP LaserJet Analog  
Fax Accessory 300 is  
installed)  
Normal (default)  
Off  
Disable V.34 modulations if several fax  
failures have occurred or if phone line  
conditions require it.  
Fax Speaker Mode  
(only available if the  
HP LaserJet Analog  
Fax Accessory 300 is  
installed)  
Normal (default)  
Diagnostic  
Use this feature to evaluate and diagnose fax  
issues by listening to the sounds of fax  
modulations.  
44 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2-16 Troubleshooting menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Paper Path Test  
Print Test Page  
Print  
Generate a test page for testing the paper-  
handling features. Define the path for the test  
in order to test specific paper paths.  
Source  
All trays  
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
Specify whether the test page is printed from  
all trays or from a specific tray.  
(Additional trays are  
shown, if applicable.)  
Destination  
All bins  
Select the output option for the test page.  
Send the test page to all output bins or only  
to a specific bin.  
Stacker Bin  
Standard Output Bin  
Off (default)  
On  
Duplex  
Copies  
Select whether the duplexer should be  
included in the test.  
1,10,50,100,500  
Default=1  
Select how many pages should be sent from  
the specified source as part of the test.  
Service Test  
Follow the on-screen Provides a series of prompts that the user can  
instructions.  
follow to discover if the printer is functioning  
properly. It also makes sure that paper is not  
in the paper path.  
Print/Stop Test  
Continuous value  
from 0 to 60,000  
milliseconds.  
Default: 0  
Isolate faults by stopping the device during  
the print cycle and observing where in the  
process the image degrades. To run the test,  
specify a stop time. The next job that is sent  
to the device stops at the specified time in the  
process.  
Scanner Tests  
Control Panel  
A service technician can use this menu item  
to diagnose potential problems with the  
device scanner.  
LEDs  
Verify that the components of the control  
panel are functioning correctly.  
Display  
Buttons  
Touchscreen  
ENWW  
Use the Administration menu 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resets menu  
Administration > Resets  
Table 2-17 Resets menu  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
Clear Local Address Book  
Clear Fax Activity Log  
Clear (button)  
Use this feature to clear all addresses from the address books that  
are stored on the device.  
Yes  
Use this feature to clear all events from the Fax Activity Log.  
No (default)  
Restore Factory Telecom Setting Restore (button)  
Use this option to restore the telephone-related settings that are in  
the Initial Setup menu to factory default values.  
Restore Factory Settings  
Restore (button)  
Clear (button)  
Use this feature to restore all device settings to their factory defaults.  
Clear Maintenance Message  
Clear the Order maintenance kit and Replace maintenance kit  
warning messages.  
Reset Supplies  
Lock Carriage  
New Maintenance Kit (Yes/No)  
Lock (button)  
Notify the device that a new maintenance kit has been installed.  
Use the feature to lock the carriage. To unlock the carriage, turn the  
MFP off and then on.  
Service menu  
Administration > Service  
The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized  
service personnel.  
46 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Supported operating systems for Windows  
The product supports the following Windows operating systems:  
Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit)  
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)  
Windows 2000  
Windows Vista  
48 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Supported printer drivers for Windows  
PCL 6  
PCL 5 – Product Specific Driver based on the HP Universal Print Driver.  
PS – Product Specific Driver based on the HP Universal Print Driver.  
The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also describes  
the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver.  
ENWW  
Supported printer drivers for Windows 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HP Universal Print Driver (UPD)  
The HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) for Windows is a single driver that gives you instant access to  
virtually any HP LaserJet product, from any location, without downloading separate drivers. It is built on  
proven HP print driver technology and has been tested thoroughly and used with many software  
programs. It is a powerful solution that performs consistently over time.  
The HP UPD communicates directly with each HP product, gathers configuration information, and then  
customizes the user interface to show the product’s unique, available features. It automatically enables  
features that are available for the product, such as two-sided printing and stapling, so you do not need  
to enable them manually.  
For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/upd.  
UPD installation modes  
Traditional mode  
Use this mode if you are installing the driver from a CD for a single computer.  
When installed with this mode, UPD operates like traditional printer drivers.  
If you use this mode, you must install UPD separately for each computer.  
Dynamic mode  
Use this mode if you are installing the driver for a mobile computer, so you can  
discover and print to HP products in any location.  
Use this mode if you are installing UPD for a workgroup.  
To use this mode, download UPD from the Internet. See www.hp.com/go/  
upd.  
50 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Select the correct printer driver for Windows  
Printer drivers provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with the  
product (using a printer language). Check the installation notes and readme files on the device CD for  
additional software and languages.  
HP PCL 6 driver description  
Recommended for printing in all Windows environments  
Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and product-feature support for most users  
Developed to align with the Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for the best speed in Windows  
environments  
Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs that are based on  
PCL 5  
HP postscript emulation Product Specific Driver based on the HP Universal Print Driver Description  
Recommended for printing with Adobe® software programs or with other highly graphics-intensive  
software programs  
Provides support for printing from postscript level 3 emulation needs, or for postscript flash font  
support  
Performs slightly faster than the PCL 6 driver when using Adobe software programs  
HP PCL 5 Product Specific Driver based on the HP Universal Print Driver Description  
Recommended for general office printing in Windows environments  
Compatible with previous PCL versions and older HP LaserJet products  
The best choice for printing from third-party or custom software programs  
The best choice when operating with mixed environments, which require the product to be set to  
PCL 5 (UNIX, Linux, mainframe)  
Designed for use in corporate Windows environments to provide a single driver for use with multiple  
printer models  
Preferred when printing to multiple printer models from a mobile Windows computer  
ENWW  
Select the correct printer driver for Windows 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Priority for print settings  
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:  
NOTE: The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.  
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program  
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here override settings changed  
anywhere else.  
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program  
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower  
priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.  
Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver): Click Properties in the Print dialog box to open  
the printer driver. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box do not override settings  
anywhere else in the printing software.  
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in  
all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog  
boxes.  
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority  
than changes made anywhere else.  
52 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Change printer-driver settings for Windows  
Change the settings for all print jobs Change the default settings for all  
Change the product configuration  
until the software program is closed  
print jobs  
settings  
1. On the File menu in the software  
program, click Print.  
1. Windows XP and Windows  
Server 2003 (using the default  
Start menu view): Click Start, and  
then click Printers and Faxes.  
1. Windows XP and Windows  
Server 2003 (using the default  
Start menu view): Click Start, and  
then click Printers and Faxes.  
2. Select the driver, and then click  
Properties or Preferences.  
-or-  
-or-  
The steps can vary; this procedure is  
most common.  
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and  
Windows Server 2003 (using the  
Classic Start menu view): Click  
Start, click Settings, and then click  
Printers.  
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and  
Windows Server 2003 (using the  
Classic Start menu view): Click  
Start, click Settings, and then click  
Printers.  
-or-  
-or-  
Windows Vista: Click Start, click  
Control Panel, and then in the  
category for Hardware and  
Sound click Printer.  
Windows Vista: Click Start, click  
Control Panel, and then in the  
category for Hardware and  
Sound click Printer.  
2. Right-click the driver icon, and then 2. Right-click the driver icon, and then  
select Printing Preferences.  
select Properties.  
3. Click the Device Settings tab.  
ENWW  
Change printer-driver settings for Windows 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Install the Windows software  
Install Windows software for direct connections  
When installing the product software in a direct-connect environment, always install the software before  
connecting the USB cable. In addition, make sure to use a standard 2-meter USB cable.  
1. Close all software programs that are open or running.  
2. Insert the product CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:  
a. On the Start menu, click Run.  
b. Type the following: X:\setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).  
c. Click OK.  
3. When prompted, click Install.  
The print driver screen appears.  
4. Select the driver to be installed and follow the instructions on the computer screen  
5. Click Finish when the installation has completed.  
6. From the Next Steps screen, select Add, Tonal options or driver if desired.  
7. Select Exit to close the installer.  
8. You might need to restart the computer.  
9. Print a test page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.  
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files on the  
product CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the product box, or go to www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp  
or www.hp.com/support/ljm9050mfp for help or more information.  
Install Windows software for networks  
The software on the product CD-ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network. For  
network installation on other operating systems, go to www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or  
The installer does not support product installation or object creation on Novell servers. It supports only  
direct-mode network installations between Windows computers and a product. To install the product  
and create objects on a Novell server, use an HP utility (such as HP Web Jetadmin) or a Novell utility  
(such as NWAdmin).  
1. If you are installing the software on Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or  
Windows Vista, make sure that you have administrator privileges.  
2. Make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server and printer are correctly connected to the network.  
Print a configuration page, and find the HP Jetdirect page. On the HPJetdirect page, locate the IP  
address that is currently configured. You might need this address to initially identify the product on  
your network and complete the installation.  
3. Close all software programs that are open or running.  
54 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Insert the product CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:  
a. On the Start menu, click Run.  
b. Type the following: X:\setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).  
c. Click OK.  
5. When prompted, click Install. The print driver screen appears.  
6. Select the driver to be installed and follow the instructions on the computer screen  
7. Click Finish when the installation has completed.  
8. From the Next Steps screen, select Add, Tonal options or driver if desired.  
9. Select Exit to close the installer.  
10. You might need to restart the computer.  
11. Print a test page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.  
Remove software for Windows  
1. Click Start, and then click All Programs.  
2. Click HP, and then click HP LaserJet M9040 and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP.  
3. Click Uninstall HP LaserJet M9040 and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP, and then follow the onscreen  
instructions to remove the software.  
ENWW  
Install the Windows software 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Supported utilities  
This MFP is equipped with several utilities that make it easy to monitor and manage the MFP on a  
network.  
HP Web Jetadmin  
HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool for HP Jetdirect-connected printers within your  
intranet, and it should be installed only on the network administrator’s computer.  
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems,  
When installed on a host server, a Windows client can gain access to HP Web Jetadmin by using a  
supported Web browser (such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer 4.x or Netscape Navigator 4.x or later)  
by navigating to the HP Web Jetadmin host.  
Embedded Web server  
The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about  
device and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet  
Explorer, Netscape Navigator, Apple Safari, or Firefox.  
The embedded Web server resides on the device. It is not loaded on a network server.  
The embedded Web server provides an interface to the device that anyone who has a network-  
connected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or  
configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the  
embedded Web server, type the IP address for the device in the address line of the browser. (To find  
the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page,  
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see  
HP Easy Printer Care  
HP Easy Printer Care software is a program that you can use for the following tasks:  
Check the product status  
Check the supplies status and use HP SureSupply to shop online for supplies  
Set up alerts  
View product usage reports  
View product documentation  
Gain access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools  
Use HP Proactive Support to routinely scan your printing system and to prevent potential problems.  
HP Proactive Support can update software, firmware, and HP printer drivers.  
You can view HP Easy Printer Care software when the product is directly connected to your computer  
or when it is connected to a network.  
56 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Supported operating systems  
Microsoft® Windows 2000  
Microsoft Windows XP, Service Pack 2 (Home and  
Professional editions)  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
Microsoft Windows Vista™  
Supported browsers  
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or 7.0  
To download HP Easy Printer Care software , go to www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare. This Web site also  
provides updated information about supported browsers and a list of HP products that support HP Easy  
Printer Care software.  
For more information about using HP Easy Printer Care software, see Open the HP Easy Printer Care  
ENWW  
Supported utilities 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Software for other operating systems  
OS  
Software  
UNIX  
For HP-UX and Solaris networks, go to www.hp.com/support/net_printing to download the  
HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX.  
Linux  
For information, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.  
58 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Software for Macintosh  
Supported operating systems for Macintosh  
The device supports the following Macintosh operating systems:  
Mac OS X V10.2.8, V10.3, V10.4 and later  
NOTE: For Mac OS V10.4 and later, PPC and Intel Core Processor Macs are supported.  
Supported printer drivers for Macintosh  
The HP installer provides PostScript® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs),  
and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers.  
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to device features.  
Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the computer.  
Software installation types for Macintosh  
Install Macintosh software for direct connections (USB)  
Mac OS X V10.2.8  
1. Make sure the product is turned on.  
2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the CD does not run automatically, double-click the CD  
icon on the desktop.  
3. Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.  
4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
5. Connect a USB cable between the product USB port and the computer USB port. Use a standard  
2-meter (6.56-foot) USB cable.  
NOTE: USB printer queues are created automatically when the product is attached to the  
computer. However, the queue will use a generic PPD if the installer has not been run before the  
USB cable is connected.  
6. On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Print Center.  
7. If the product name appears in the Printer list, setup is complete. If the product name does not  
appear in the printer list, continue with the next step.  
8. Click Add or +, and then select USB from the drop-down list. Select the product name from the  
printer list.  
9. Click Add. The Installable Options dialog box appears. Select the product options that you are  
using.  
10. Print a test page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.  
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or late-breaking  
readme files on the device CD or the flyer that came in the box for help.  
60 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Mac OS X V10.3 and later  
1. Make sure the product is turned on.  
2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the CD does not run automatically, double-click the CD  
icon on the desktop.  
3. Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.  
4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
5. Connect a USB cable between the product USB port and the computer USB port. Use a standard  
2-meter (6.56-foot) USB cable.  
NOTE: USB printer queues are created automatically when the product is attached to the  
computer. However, the queue will use a generic PPD if the installer has not been run before the  
USB cable is connected.  
6. From the Apple menu, click System Preferences and then Print & Fax.  
7. If the product name appears in the Printer list, setup is complete. If the product name does not  
appear in the printer list, continue with the next step.  
8. Click Add or +, and then select Default Browser or Default. Select the product name from the  
Printer Browser.  
9. Click Add. The Installable Options dialog box appears. Select the product options that you are  
using.  
10. Print a test page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.  
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or late-breaking  
readme files on the device CD or the flyer that came in the box for help.  
Install Macintosh software for networks  
Mac OS X V10.2.8  
1. Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.  
2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the CD does not run automatically, double-click the CD  
icon on the desktop.  
3. Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.  
4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
5. On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Print Center.  
6. Click Add.  
7. From the drop-down list, select the connection type.  
Rendezvous  
a. Select the product from the list.  
b. Select the printer model if one is not already selected.  
ENWW  
Software for Macintosh 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Printing  
a. Enter the IP address for the product.  
b. Select the printer model if one is not already selected.  
8. Click Add. The Installable Options dialog box appears. Select the product options that you are  
using.  
9. Print a test page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.  
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or late-breaking  
readme files on the device CD or the flyer that came in the box for help.  
Mac OS X V10.3 and later  
1. Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.  
2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the CD does not run automatically, double-click the CD  
icon on the desktop.  
3. Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.  
4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
5. From the Apple menu, click System Preferences and then Print & Fax.  
6. Click Add or +.  
7. Select the connection type.  
Default Browser  
a. Select the product from the list.  
b. From the Print Using drop-down list, select the printer model if one is not already selected.  
IP Printer  
a. From the Protocol drop-down list, select HP Jetdirect Socket.  
b. Enter the IP address for the product.  
c. From the Print Using drop-down list, select the printer model if one is not already selected.  
8. Click Add. The Installable Options dialog box appears. Select the product options that you are  
using.  
9. Print a test page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.  
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or late-breaking  
readme files on the device CD or the flyer that came in the box for help.  
Software for Macintosh computers  
HP Printer Utility  
Use the HP Printer Utility to set up product features that are not available in the printer driver.  
62 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
You can use the HP Printer Utility when the product uses a universal serial bus (USB) cable or is  
connected to a TCP/IP-based network.  
Open the HP Printer Utility  
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.2.8  
1. Open the Finder, and then click Applications.  
2. Click Library, and then click Printers.  
3. Click hp, and then click Utilities.  
4. Double-click HP Printer Selector to open the HP Printer Selector.  
5. Select the product that you want to configure, and then click Utility.  
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.3 and V10.4  
1. Open the Finder, click Applications, click Utilities, and then double-click Printer Setup Utility.  
2. Select the product that you want to configure, and then click Utility.  
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.5  
From the Printer menu, click Printer Utility.  
-or-  
From the Print Queue, click the Utility icon.  
HP Printer Utility features  
The HP Printer Utility consists of pages that you open by clicking in the Configuration Settings list.  
The following table describes the tasks that you can perform from these pages.  
Item  
Description  
Configuration Page  
Supplies Status  
HP Support  
Prints a configuration page.  
Shows the device supplies status and provides links for online supplies-ordering.  
Provides access to technical assistance, online supplies ordering, online registration, and  
recycling and return information.  
File Upload  
Transfers files from the computer to the device.  
Upload Fonts  
Transfers font files from the computer to the device.  
Transfers updated firmware files from the computer to the device.  
Turns on the automatic two-sided printing mode.  
Firmware Update  
Duplex Mode  
Economode & Toner Density  
Resolution  
Turns on the Economode setting to conserve toner, or adjusts toner density.  
Changes the resolution settings, including the REt setting.  
Locks or unlocks storage products, such as a hard disk.  
Manages print jobs that are stored on the device hard disk.  
Changes the default tray settings.  
Lock Resources  
Stored Jobs  
Trays Configuration  
ENWW  
Software for Macintosh 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Item  
Description  
IP Settings  
Changes the device network settings and provides access to the embedded Web server.  
Bonjour Settings  
Provides the ability to turn on or off Bonjour support or change the device service name  
that is listed on a network.  
Additional Settings  
E-mail Alerts  
Provides access to the embedded Web server.  
Configures the device to send e-mail notices for certain events.  
Priority for print settings for Macintosh  
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:  
NOTE: The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.  
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program  
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here might override settings changed  
anywhere else.  
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program  
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower  
priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.  
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in  
all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog  
boxes.  
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority  
than changes made anywhere else.  
Change printer-driver settings for Macintosh  
Change the settings for all print jobs Change the default settings for all  
Change the product configuration  
settings  
until the software program is closed  
print jobs  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
Mac OS X V10.2.8  
2. Change the settings that you want 2. Change the settings that you want 1. In the Finder, on the Go menu, click  
on the various menus.  
on the various menus.  
Applications.  
3. On the Presets menu, click Save  
as and type a name for the preset.  
2. Open Utilities, and then open Print  
Center.  
These settings are saved in the  
3. Click on the print queue.  
Presets menu. To use the new settings,  
you must select the saved preset option  
every time you open a program and print.  
4. On the Printers menu, click  
Configure.  
5. Click the Installable Options  
menu.  
NOTE: Configuration settings might  
not be available in Classic mode.  
64 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Change the settings for all print jobs Change the default settings for all  
until the software program is closed print jobs  
Change the product configuration  
settings  
Mac OS X V10.3 or Mac OS X V10.4  
1. From the Apple menu, click System  
Preferences and then Print &  
Fax.  
2. Click Printer Setup.  
3. Click the Installable Options  
menu.  
Mac OS X V10.5  
1. From the Apple menu, click System  
Preferences and then Print &  
Fax.  
2. Click Options & Supplies.  
3. Click the Driver menu.  
4. Select the driver from the list, and  
configure the installed options.  
Remove software from Macintosh operating systems  
To remove the software from a Macintosh computer, drag the PPD files to the trash can.  
Supported utilities for Macintosh  
Embedded Web server  
The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about  
device and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet  
Explorer, Netscape Navigator, Apple Safari, or Firefox.  
The embedded Web server resides on the device. It is not loaded on a network server.  
The embedded Web server provides an interface to the device that anyone who has a network-  
connected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or  
configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the  
embedded Web server, type the IP address for the device in the address line of the browser. (To find  
the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page,  
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see  
ENWW  
Software for Macintosh 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver  
Create and use printing presets in Macintosh  
Use printing presets to save the current printer driver settings for reuse.  
Create a printing preset  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Select the print settings.  
4. In the Presets box, click Save As..., and type a name for the preset.  
5. Click OK.  
Use printing presets  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. In the Presets box, select the printing preset that you want to use.  
NOTE: To use printer-driver default settings, select Standard.  
Resize documents or print on a custom paper size  
You can scale a document to fit on a different size of paper.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Paper Handling menu.  
3. In the area for Destination Paper Size, select Scale to fit paper size, and then select the size  
from the drop-down list.  
4. If you want to use only paper that is smaller than the document, select Scale down only.  
Print a cover page  
You can print a separate cover page for your document that includes a message (such as “Confidential”).  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Open the Cover Page menu, and then select whether to print the cover page Before Document  
or After Document.  
4. In the Cover Page Type menu, select the message that you want to print on the cover page.  
NOTE: To print a blank cover page, select Standard as the Cover Page Type.  
66 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Use watermarks  
A watermark is a notice, such as “Confidential,” that is printed in the background of each page of a  
document.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Watermarks menu.  
3. Next to Mode, select the type of watermark to use. Select Watermark to print a semi-transparent  
message. Select Overlay to print a message that is not transparent.  
4. Next to Pages, select whether to print the watermark on all pages or on the first page only.  
5. Next to Text, select one of the standard messages, or select Custom and type a new message in  
the box.  
6. Select options for the remaining settings.  
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper in Macintosh  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way  
to print draft pages.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Open the Layout menu.  
4. Next to Pages per Sheet, select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet (1, 2,  
4, 6, 9, or 16).  
5. Next to Layout Direction, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.  
6. Next to Borders, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Print on both sides of the page (duplex printing)  
Use automatic duplex printing  
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special  
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:  
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.  
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper face-down with the top edge at the back of the  
tray.  
2. On the File menu, click Print.  
3. Open the Layout menu.  
4. Next to Two-Sided, select either Long-Edge Binding or Short-Edge Binding.  
5. Click Print.  
Print on both sides manually  
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special  
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:  
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.  
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper face-down with the top edge at the back of the  
tray.  
CAUTION: To avoid jams, do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28-lb bond).  
2. On the File menu, click Print.  
3. On the Finishing menu, select Manually Print on 2nd Side.  
4. Click Print. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window that appears on the computer screen  
before replacing the output stack in tray 1 for printing the second half.  
5. Go to the printer, and remove any blank paper that is in tray 1.  
6. Insert the printed stack face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first in tray 1. You  
must print the second side from tray 1.  
7. If prompted, press the appropriate control-panel button to continue.  
Set the stapling options  
If a finishing device that has a stapler is installed, you can staple documents.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Finishing menu.  
3. In the Stapling Options drop-down list, select the stapling option that you want to use.  
68 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Store jobs  
You can store jobs on the product so you can print them at any time. You can share stored jobs with  
other users, or you can make them private.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Job Storage menu.  
3. In the Job Storage: drop-down list, select the type of stored job.  
4. For the Stored Job, Private Job, and Private Stored Job types of stored jobs, enter a name for  
the stored job in the box next to Job Name:.  
Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name.  
Use Job Name + (1 - 99) appends a unique number to the end of the job name.  
Replace Existing File overwrites the existing stored job with the new one.  
5. If you selected Stored Job or Private Job in step 3, type a 4-digit number in the box next to PIN  
To Print (0000 - 9999). When other people attempt to print this job, the product prompts them to  
enter this PIN number.  
Use the Services menu  
If the product is connected to a network, use the Services menu to obtain product and supply-status  
information.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Services menu.  
3. To open the embedded Web server and perform a maintenance task, do the following:  
a. Select Device Maintenance.  
b. Select a task from the drop-down list.  
c. Click Launch.  
4. To go to various support Web sites for this device, do the following:  
a. Select Services on the Web.  
b. Select Internet Services, and select an option from the drop-down list.  
c. Click Go!.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
70 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Connectivity  
ENWW  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
USB connection  
This MFP supports a Type B Hi-speed USB 2.0 connection for printing.  
Figure 5-1 USB connection  
72 Chapter 5 Connectivity  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Auxiliary connection  
This MFP supports an auxiliary connection for paper handling output devices. The port is located on the  
back of the MFP.  
Figure 5-2 Auxiliary connection  
1
Auxiliary connection port (Jetlink)  
ENWW  
Auxiliary connection 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Network configuration  
You might need to configure certain network parameters on the device. You can configure these  
parameters in the following locations:  
Installation software  
Device control panel  
Embedded Web server  
Management software (HP Web Jetadmin or HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh)  
NOTE: For more information about using the embedded Web server, see Embedded Web server  
For more information on supported networks and network configuration tools, see the HP Jetdirect Print  
Server Administrator’s Guide. The guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server is  
installed.  
This section contains the following information about configuring network parameters:  
Configure TCP/IPv4 parameters  
If your network doesn't provide automatic IP addressing through DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, or another  
method, you might need to enter the following parameters manually before you can print over the  
network:  
IP address (4 bytes)  
Subnet mask (4 bytes)  
Default gateway (4 bytes)  
Change the IP address  
You can view the current IP address of the device from the control-panel Home screen by touching  
Network Address.  
Use the following procedure to change the IP address manually.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch Networking and I/O.  
4. Touch Embedded Jetdirect.  
5. Touch TCP/IP.  
74 Chapter 5 Connectivity  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
6. Touch IPV4 Settings.  
7. Touch Config Method.  
8. Touch Manual.  
9. Touch Save.  
10. Touch Manual Settings.  
11. Touch IP Address.  
12. Touch the IP Address text box.  
13. Use the touchscreen keypad to type the IP address.  
14. Touch OK.  
15. Touch Save.  
Set the subnet mask  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch Networking and I/O.  
4. Touch Embedded Jetdirect.  
5. Touch TCP/IP.  
6. Touch IPV4 Settings.  
7. Touch Config Method.  
8. Touch Manual.  
9. Touch Save.  
10. Touch Manual Settings.  
11. Touch Subnet Mask.  
12. Touch the Subnet Mask text box.  
13. Use the touchscreen keypad to type the subnet mask.  
14. Touch OK.  
15. Touch Save.  
Set the default gateway  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch Networking and I/O.  
4. Touch Embedded Jetdirect.  
ENWW  
Network configuration 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5. Touch TCP/IP.  
6. Touch IPV4 Settings.  
7. Touch Config Method.  
8. Touch Manual.  
9. Touch Save.  
10. Touch Manual Settings.  
11. Touch Default Gateway.  
12. Touch the Default Gateway text box.  
13. Use the touchscreen keyboard to type the default gateway.  
14. Touch OK.  
15. Touch Save.  
Configure TCP/IPv6 parameters  
For information about configuring the device for a TCP/IPv6 network, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server  
Administrator's Guide.  
Disable network protocols (optional)  
By factory default, all supported network protocols are enabled. Disabling unused protocols has the  
following benefits:  
It decreases device-generated network traffic.  
It prevents unauthorized users from printing to the device.  
It provides only pertinent information on the configuration page.  
It allows the device control panel to display protocol-specific error and warning messages.  
Disable IPX/SPX  
NOTE: Do not disable this protocol in Windows-based systems that print to the printer through IPX/  
SPX.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch Networking and I/O.  
4. Touch Embedded Jetdirect.  
5. Touch IPX/SPX.  
6. Touch Enable.  
7. Touch Off.  
8. Touch Save.  
76 Chapter 5 Connectivity  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Disable AppleTalk  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch Networking and I/O.  
4. Touch Embedded Jetdirect.  
5. Touch AppleTalk.  
6. Touch Enable.  
7. Touch Off.  
8. Touch Save.  
Disable DLC/LLC  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch Networking and I/O.  
4. Touch Embedded Jetdirect.  
5. Touch DLC/LLC.  
6. Touch Enable.  
7. Touch Off.  
8. Touch Save.  
HP Jetdirect EIO print servers  
HP Jetdirect print servers (network cards) can be installed in the EIO slot. Supported networking features  
depend on the print server model. For available HP Jetdirect EIO print server models, go to  
NOTE: Configure the card through the control panel, the printer installation software, or HP Web  
Jetadmin. Refer to the HP Jetdirect print server documentation for more information.  
ENWW  
Network configuration 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
78 Chapter 5 Connectivity  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understand paper and print media use  
This product supports a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in this  
user guide. Paper or print media that does not meet these guidelines might cause the following problems:  
Poor print quality  
Increased jams  
Premature wear on the product, requiring repair  
For best results, use only HP-brand paper and print media designed for laserjets or multiuse. Do not  
use paper or print media made for inkjet printers. Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the  
use of other brands of media because HP cannot control their quality.  
It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this user guide and still not produce satisfactory  
results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and/or humidity levels,  
or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.  
CAUTION: Using paper or print media that does not meet Hewlett-Packard's specifications might  
cause problems for the product, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard  
warranty or service agreements.  
80 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Supported paper and print media sizes  
This product supports a number of paper sizes, and it adapts to various media.  
NOTE: To obtain best print results, select the appropriate paper size and type in your print driver before  
printing.  
Table 6-1 Supported paper and print media sizes  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray 1, Letter  
R, A4  
Trays 2 and 3, Tray 4, Letter  
Stapler /  
Stacker lower  
bin  
Letter R, A4  
R, A4  
Letter  
Legal  
A4  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)  
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 in.)  
184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 in.)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)  
Executive  
Executive  
(JIS)  
A3  
297 x 420 mm (11.69 x 16.54 in.)  
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in.)  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 in.)  
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.)  
279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 in.)  
A5  
A6  
Statement  
11 x 17  
12 x 18  
B4 (JIS)  
RA3  
305 x 457 mm (12 x 18 in.)  
257 x 364 mm (10.12 x 14.33 in.)  
305 x 430 mm (12.01 x 16.93 in.)  
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 in.)  
270 x390 mm (10.63 x 15.35 in.)  
197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.75 in.)  
B5 (JIS)  
8k  
16k  
Table 6-2 Supported envelopes and postcards  
Size Dimensions  
Tray 1, mailbox,  
stacker  
Trays 2, 3, 4  
Stapler  
Envelope #10 105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.49 in.)  
Envelope DL  
Envelope C5  
Envelope B5  
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 in.)  
162 x 229 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in.)  
176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 in.)  
98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in.)  
Envelope  
Monarch  
Post Card  
100 x 148 mm (3.94 x 5.83 in.)  
ENWW  
Supported paper and print media sizes 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 6-2 Supported envelopes and postcards (continued)  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray 1, mailbox,  
stacker  
Trays 2, 3, 4  
Stapler  
Double Post  
Card  
148 x 200 mm (5.83 x 7.87 in.)  
Postcard (US) 88.9 x 139.7 mm (3.5 x 5.5 in.)  
Postcard  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 in.)  
(European)  
82 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Custom paper sizes  
This product supports a variety of custom paper sizes. Supported custom sizes are sizes that are within  
the minimum- and maximum-size guidelines for the product but are not listed in the supported paper  
sizes table. When using a supported custom size, specify the custom size in the print driver, and load  
the paper in a tray that supports custom sizes.  
ENWW  
Custom paper sizes 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Special paper or print media guidelines  
This product supports printing on special media. Use the following guidelines to obtain satisfactory  
results. When using special paper or print media, be sure to set the type and size in your print driver to  
obtain the best print results.  
CAUTION: HP LaserJet printers use fusers to bond dry toner particles to the paper in very precise  
dots. HP laser paper is designed to withstand this extreme heat. Using inkjet paper not designed for this  
technology could damage your printer.  
Media type  
Do  
Do not  
Envelopes  
Store envelopes flat.  
Do not use envelopes that are  
wrinkled, nicked, stuck together, or  
otherwise damaged.  
Use envelopes where the seam  
extends all the way to the corner of  
the envelope.  
Do not use envelopes that have  
clasps, snaps, windows, or coated  
linings.  
Use peel-off adhesive strips that  
are approved for use in laser  
printers.  
Do not use self-stick adhesives or  
other synthetic materials.  
Labels  
Use only labels that have no  
exposed backing between them.  
Do not use labels that have wrinkles  
or bubbles, or are damaged.  
Use Labels that lie flat.  
Do not print partial sheets of labels.  
Use only full sheets of labels.  
Transparencies  
Use only transparencies that are  
approved for use in laser printers.  
Do not use transparent print media  
not approved for laser printers.  
Place transparencies on a flat  
surface after removing them from  
the product.  
Letterhead or preprinted forms  
Heavy paper  
Use only letterhead or forms  
approved for use in laser printers.  
Do not use raised or metallic  
letterhead.  
Use only heavy paper that is  
approved for use in laser printers  
and meets the weight specifications  
for this product.  
Do not use paper that is heavier  
than the recommended media  
specification for this product unless  
it is HP paper that has been  
approved for use in this product.  
Glossy or coated paper  
Use only glossy or coated paper  
that is approved for use in laser  
printers.  
Do not use glossy or coated paper  
designed for use in inkjet products.  
84 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Load paper and print media  
This section contains information about loading standard- and custom-size media into the four input  
trays.  
CAUTION: To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from tray 1 or open tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4  
while printing or copying from that tray. To avoid damaging the MFP, print labels, envelopes, and  
transparencies from tray 1 only. Send labels, envelopes, and transparencies to the upper bin. Print on  
only one side of labels, envelopes, and transparencies.  
Load tray 1  
Tray 1 holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 10 envelopes. For more information about supported media,  
1. Open tray 1.  
Figure 6-1 Load tray 1 (1 of 3)  
2. Load paper according to size and finishing options.  
Figure 6-2 Load tray 1 (2 of 3)  
CAUTION: To avoid jams, print sheets of labels one sheet at a time.  
3. Adjust the paper guides so they lightly touch the paper stack, but do not bend the paper.  
Figure 6-3 Load tray 1 (3 of 3)  
4. Make sure the paper fits under the tabs on the guides and not above the load level indicators.  
ENWW  
Load paper and print media 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
NOTE: If printing on A3- or 11 x 17-size paper, or other long media, also pull out the tray extension  
until it stops.  
Load trays 2, 3, and 4  
Trays 2 and 3 hold up to 500 sheets of standard media. Tray 4 holds up to 2,000 sheets of standard  
media. For information about paper specifications, see Supported paper and print media sizes  
Load detectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4  
Follow this procedure to load detectable standard-size paper in the tray. The following are the detectable  
sizes, which are marked inside the tray:  
A4  
Letter  
A3  
Legal  
Executive  
11 x 17  
B4 (JIS)  
B5 (JIS)  
A4-Rotated  
Letter-Rotated  
CAUTION: To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from a tray while printing from that tray.  
1. Open the tray until it stops.  
Figure 6-4 Load trays 2, 3, and 4 (1 of 6)  
86 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Adjust the left (Y) paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and set the guide to the correct  
paper size.  
Figure 6-5 Load trays 2, 3, and 4 (2 of 6)  
3. Adjust the front (X) paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and set the guide to the correct  
paper size.  
Figure 6-6 Load trays 2, 3, and 4 (3 of 6)  
4. Load (orient) the paper according to size.  
Figure 6-7 Load trays 2, 3, and 4 (4 of 6)  
5. Set the Custom/Standard switch to Standard.  
Figure 6-8 Load trays 2, 3, and 4 (5 of 6)  
ENWW  
Load paper and print media 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Close the tray. The MFP control panel might show the tray media type and size. If the configuration  
is not correct, touch Modify on the control panel. If the configuration is correct, touch OK.  
Figure 6-9 Load trays 2, 3, and 4 (6 of 6)  
Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4  
Follow this procedure to load undetectable standard-size paper in the tray. The following are the  
undetectable sizes:  
8K  
16K  
Statement  
JIS Executive  
8.5 x 13 (216 x 330 mm).  
CAUTION: To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from a tray while printing from that tray.  
1. Open the tray until it stops.  
Figure 6-10 Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4 (1 of 6)  
2. Press the tab on the front paper guide and slide the guide all the way out.  
3. Press the tab on the left paper guide and slide the guide all the way out.  
4. Load (orient) the paper according to size.  
Figure 6-11 Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4 (2 of 6)  
88 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Adjust the left paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and slide the guide until it gently touches  
the paper  
Figure 6-12 Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4 (3 of 6)  
6. Adjust the front paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and slide the guide until it gently  
touches the paper.  
Figure 6-13 Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4 (4 of 6)  
NOTE: When loading tray 4, make sure that the paper guide lock is in the up position.  
7. Set the Custom/Standard switch to Custom.  
Figure 6-14 Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4 (5 of 6)  
8. Close the tray. The MFP control panel might show the tray media type and size. If the configuration  
is not correct, touch Modify on the control panel. If the configuration is correct, touch OK.  
Figure 6-15 Load undetectable standard-size paper in trays 2, 3, and 4 (6 of 6)  
Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4  
Use the following procedure to load custom-size paper in the tray.  
ENWW  
Load paper and print media 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION: To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from a tray while printing from that tray.  
1. Open the tray until it stops.  
Figure 6-16 Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4 (1 of 6)  
2. Press the tab on the front (X) paper guide and slide the guide all the way out.  
3. Press the tab on the left (Y) paper guide and slide the guide all the way out.  
4. Load (orient) the paper according to size.  
Figure 6-17 Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4 (2 of 6)  
5. Set the Custom/Standard switch to Custom.  
Figure 6-18 Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4 (3 of 6)  
6. Adjust the left (Y) paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and slide the guide until it gently  
touches the paper  
Figure 6-19 Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4 (4 of 6)  
90 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Adjust the front (X) paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and slide the guide until it gently  
touches the paper.  
Figure 6-20 Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4 (5 of 6)  
8. Note the orientation of the paper, as well as the value of the X dimension and the Y dimension.  
The X and Y dimensions are marked in the tray. You will need this information for a later step.  
NOTE: When loading tray 4, make sure that the paper guide lock is in the up position.  
9. Close the tray. The MFP control panel might show the tray media type and size. If the configuration  
is not correct, touch Modify on the control panel. If the configuration is correct, touch OK.  
Figure 6-21 Load custom media in trays 2, 3, and 4 (6 of 6)  
ENWW  
Load paper and print media 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configure trays  
The MFP might automatically prompt you to configure a tray for type and size when you load media into  
the tray.  
The following message appears on the control panel: Tray <X> [type] [size] To change size or type,  
touch “Modify”. To accept, touch “OK”..  
NOTE: The prompt does not appear if you are printing from tray 1 and tray 1 is configured for Any  
Size and Any Type.  
NOTE: If you have used other HP LaserJet printer models, you might be accustomed to configuring  
tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode. On the HP LaserJet M9040/M9050 MFP, setting tray 1 size and  
type to Any Size is equivalent to First mode. Setting size or type for tray 1 to a setting other than Any  
Size is equivalent to Cassette mode.  
Configure a tray when loading media  
1. Load media in the tray. Close the tray if you are using tray 2, 3, or 4.  
2. If the tray configuration message appears, touch OK to accept the detected size, or touch Modify  
to choose a different paper size.  
3. If modifying the tray configuration, select the size.  
NOTE: The MFP automatically detects most media sizes in trays 2, 3, and 4.  
4. If modifying the tray configuration, select the paper type.  
5. Touch Exit.  
Configure a tray by using the Supplies Status button on the touchscreen  
You can also configure the trays for type and size without a prompt from the MFP.  
1. Scroll to and touch Supplies Status.  
2. Touch the desired tray.  
3. Touch Modify.  
4. Select the size and type. If you select a custom type, use the numeric keypad to set the X dimension  
and the Y dimension, and then touch OK.  
5. Touch OK.  
6. Touch OK again.  
Select the media by source, type, or size  
In the Microsoft Windows operating system, three settings affect how the printer driver tries to pull media  
when you send a print job. Source, Type, and Size settings appear in the Page Setup, Print, or Print  
Properties dialog boxes in most software programs. Unless you change these settings, the MFP  
automatically selects a tray using the default settings.  
92 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Source  
To print by Source select a specific tray from MFP to pull from. The MFP tries to print from this tray, no  
matter what type or size is loaded. If you select a tray that is configured for a type or size that does not  
match your print job, the MFP does not print automatically. Instead, it waits for you to load the tray with  
the type or size of print media for your print job. If you load the tray, the MFP begins printing.  
Type and Size  
Printing by Type or Size means that you want the MFP to pull from the tray that is loaded with the correct  
type and size of media. Selecting media by type rather than source is similar to locking out trays and  
helps protect special media from accidental use. For example, if a tray is configured for letterhead and  
you select plain paper, the MFP will not pull the letterhead from that tray. Instead, it will pull from a tray  
that has plain paper loaded and is configured for plain paper on the MFP control panel. Selecting media  
by Type and Size results in significantly better print quality for heavy paper, glossy paper, and  
transparencies. Using the wrong setting might result in unsatisfactory print quality. Always print by Type  
for special print media, such as labels or transparencies. Print by Size for envelopes, if possible.  
To print by Type or Size, select the Type or Size from the Page Setup dialog box, the Print dialog  
box, or the Print Properties dialog box, depending on the software program.  
If you often print on a certain type or size of media, configure a tray for that type or size. Then,  
when you select that type or size as you print a job, the MFP pulls media from the tray that is  
configured for that type or size.  
ENWW  
Configure trays 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Select the output bin  
The MFP has at least two output bin locations: the ADF output bin (1) and an output bin on the output  
device.  
Figure 6-22 Output bins  
It is recommended that you select an output location through the software program or printer driver.  
Stacker or stapler/stacker output bins  
If you choose the 3,000-sheet stacker or 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker, the output bins are the upper bin  
(2) (face up) and the lower bin (3) (face down).  
The upper bin (face-up) (2) is the top bin on the stacker or stapler/stacker. This bin holds up to 100  
sheets of paper in face-up order as they exit the MFP. A sensor causes the product to stop when the  
bin is full. Product operation continues when you empty or reduce the amount of paper in the bin.  
The lower bin (face-down) (3) is the lower bin on the stacker or stapler/stacker. This bin holds up to  
3,000 sheets of paper and allows you to stack or staple jobs. This bin is the default output bin.  
8-bin mailbox output bins  
If you choose the 8-bin mailbox, the output bins are the upper bin and the eight face-down bins.  
The upper bin (4) holds up to 125 sheets of paper.  
The network administrator can assign the eight bins (5) to individual users or workgroups. Each bin can  
stack up to 250 sheets of paper.  
Multifunction finisher output bins  
If you choose the multifunction finisher, the output bins are the upper bin ( 6) and the lower booklet bin  
(7).  
The upper bin (6) is the top bin on the multifunction finisher. This bin provides 1,000 sheets of stacking  
capacity and can offset each job as it is stacked, delivering unstapled jobs face up or face down. This  
bin also provides stapling for up to 50 sheets of paper per document. The upper bin is the default output  
bin when the multifunction finisher is attached.  
The lower booklet bin (7) is the lower bin on the multifunction finisher. This bin provides folding and  
saddle stitching of booklets for up to 10 sheets of paper.  
94 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Select an output location  
Printing  
It is recommended that you select an output location (bin) through your program or driver. Where and  
how you make selections depends on your program or driver, set the default output location from the  
MFP control panel.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Default Job Options.  
3. Touch Default Print Options.  
4. Touch Output Bin.  
5. Touch the desired output bin.  
Copying  
You can set and override the current default output location (bin) from the MFP control panel for copy  
jobs:  
1. Scroll to and touch Copy.  
2. Touch More Options.  
3. Touch Output Bin.  
4. Touch the desired output bin.  
To set the default output bin for copy jobs:  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Default Job Options.  
3. Touch Default Copy Options.  
4. Touch Output Bin.  
5. Touch the desired output bin.  
ENWW  
Select the output bin 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
96 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Media type and tray loading  
Minimum media dimensions are 98 x 191 mm (3.8 x 7.5 inches).  
Maximum media dimensions are 312 x 470 mm (12.3 x 18.5 inches).  
Table 7-1 Tray 1 media information  
Media type  
Media specifications Media quantity  
Driver settings  
Paper orientation  
64 g/m2 (17 lb) bond to  
216 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Paper and cardstock,  
standard sizes  
Maximum stack height: Plain or unspecified  
10 mm (0.6 inch)  
N/A  
Equivalent to 100  
sheets of 75 g/m2 (20  
lb) bond.  
Two-sided printing: 64  
g/m2 (17 lb) bond to 199  
g/m2 (53 lb) bond  
64 g/m2 (17 lb) bond to  
216 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Envelopes  
Up to 10 envelopes  
Envelope  
Short edge leading,  
flap on right side facing  
up  
64 g/m2 (17 lb) bond to  
216 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Labels  
Maximum stack height: Labels  
10 mm (0.6 inch)  
Side to be printed on  
facing up  
64 g/m2 (17 lb) bond to  
216 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Transparencies  
Heavy  
Maximum stack height: Transparencies  
10 mm (0.6 inch)  
Side to be printed on  
facing up  
64 g/m2 (17 lb) bond to  
216 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on  
10 mm (0.6 in.) heavy glossy facing up  
Two-sided printing: 64  
g/m2 (17 lb) bond to 199  
g/m2 (53 lb) bond  
64 g/m2 (17 lb) bond to  
216 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Glossy  
Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on  
10 mm (0.6 in.)  
heavy glossy  
facing up  
Two-sided printing: 64  
g/m2 (17 lb) bond to 199  
g/m2 (53 lb) bond  
Table 7-2 Tray 2 and 3 media information  
Media type  
Media specifications Media quantity  
Driver settings  
Paper orientation  
64 g/m2 (17 lb) bond to  
199 g/m2 (53 lb) bond  
Paper and cardstock  
Up to 500 sheets  
Plain or unspecified  
N/A  
Light glossy, glossy, or  
heavy glossy  
64 g/m2 (17 lb) bond to  
199 g/m2 (53 lb) bond  
Heavy  
Glossy  
Up to 500 sheets  
Up to 500 sheets  
Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on  
heavy glossy facing up  
64 g/m2 (17 lb) bond to  
199 g/m2 (53 lb) bond  
Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on  
heavy glossy  
facing up  
Table 7-3 Tray 4 media information  
Media type  
Media specifications Media quantity  
Driver settings  
Paper orientation  
64 g/m2 (17 lb) bond to  
199 g/m2 (53 lb) bond  
Paper and cardstock  
Up to 2000 sheets  
Plain or unspecified  
N/A  
98 Chapter 7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 7-3 Tray 4 media information (continued)  
Media type  
Media specifications Media quantity  
Driver settings  
Paper orientation  
64 g/m2 (17 lb) bond to  
199 g/m2 (53 lb) bond  
Heavy  
Up to 2000 sheets  
Up to 2000 sheets  
Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on  
heavy glossy facing up  
64 g/m2 (17 lb) bond to  
199 g/m2 (53 lb) bond  
Glossy  
Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on  
heavy glossy facing up  
ENWW  
Media type and tray loading 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use features in the Windows printer driver  
Open the printer driver  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Open the printer driver  
On the File menu in the software program, click Print. Select  
the printer, and then click Properties or Preferences.  
Get help for any printing option  
Click the ? symbol in the upper-right corner of the printer driver,  
and then click any item in the printer driver. A pop-up message  
displays that provides information about the item. Or, click  
Help to open the online Help.  
Use printing shortcuts  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Printing Shortcuts tab.  
NOTE: In previous HP printer drivers, this feature was called Quick Sets.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Use a printing shortcut  
Select one of the shortcuts, and then click OK to print the job  
with the predefined settings.  
Create a custom printing shortcut  
a) Select an existing shortcut as a base. b) Select the print  
options for the new shortcut. c) Click Save As, type a name for  
the shortcut, and click OK.  
Set paper and quality options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Paper/Quality tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Select a page size  
Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.  
Select a custom page size  
a) Click Custom. The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens.  
b) Type a name for the custom size, specify the dimensions,  
and click OK.  
Select a paper source  
Select a tray from the Paper source drop-down list.  
Select a type from the Paper type drop-down list.  
Select a paper type  
Print covers on different paper  
Print the first or last page on different paper  
a) In the Special pages area, click Covers or Print pages on  
different paper, and then click Settings. b) Select an option  
to print a blank or preprinted front cover, back cover, or both.  
Or, select an option to print the first or last page on different  
paper. c) Select options from the Paper source and Paper  
type drop-down lists, and then click Add. d) Click OK.  
Adjust the resolution of printed images  
Select draft-quality printing  
In the Print Quality area, select an option from the first drop  
down list. See the printer-driver online Help for information  
about each of the available options.  
In the Print Quality area, click EconoMode.  
100 Chapter 7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Set document effects  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Effects tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Scale a page to fit on a selected paper size  
Click Print document on, and then select a size from the drop-  
down list.  
Scale a page to be a percent of the actual size  
Print a watermark  
Click % of actual size, and then type the percent or adjust the  
slider bar.  
a) Select a watermark from the Watermarks drop-down list.  
b) To print the watermark on the first page only, click First page  
only. Otherwise, the watermark is printed on each page.  
Add or edit watermarks  
a) In the Watermarks area, click Edit. The Watermark  
Details dialog box opens. b) Specify the settings for the  
watermark, and then click OK.  
NOTE: The printer driver must be stored on your computer  
for this to work.  
Set document finishing options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Finishing tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Print on both sides (Duplex)  
Click Print on both sides. If you will bind the document along  
the top edge, click Flip pages up.  
Print a booklet  
a) Click Print on both sides. b) In the Booklet layout drop-  
down list, click Left binding or Right binding. The Pages per  
sheet option automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet.  
Print multiple pages per sheet  
Select page orientation  
a) Select the number of pages per sheet from the Pages per  
sheet drop-down list. b) Select the correct options for Print  
page borders, Page order, and Orientation.  
a) In the Orientation area, click Portrait or Landscape. b) To  
print the page image upside down, click Rotate by 180  
degrees.  
Set product output options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Output tab.  
NOTE: The options that are available on this tab depend on the finishing device that you are using.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Select staple options  
Select a stapling option from the Staple drop-down list.  
Print a separator page between copies  
a) Click Job Separator. The Separator Page Details dialog  
box opens. b) In the Separator Page Details drop-down list,  
click Separator page, and then select a paper source and a  
paper type. c) To print job-related data on the separator page,  
click any or all of the check boxes. Click OK.  
Select an output bin  
Select an output bin from the Bin drop-down list.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Windows printer driver 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Set job storage options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Job Storage tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Print one copy for proof before printing all the copies  
In the Job Storage Mode area, click Proof and Hold. The  
product prints the first copy only. A message appears on the  
product control panel that prompts you to print the rest of the  
copies.  
Temporarily store a private job on the product and print it later a) In the Job Storage Mode area, click Personal Job. b) In  
the Make Job Private area, enter a 4-digit personal  
identification number (PIN).  
Temporarily store a job on the product  
In the Job Storage Mode area, click Quick Copy. One copy  
of the job is printed immediately, but you can print more copies  
from the product control panel.  
NOTE: These jobs are deleted if the product is turned off.  
Permanently store a job on the product  
In the Job Storage Mode area, click Stored Job.  
Make a permanently stored job private so that anyone who  
tries to print it must provide a PIN  
a) In the Job Storage Mode area, click Stored Job. b) In the  
Make Job Private area, click PIN to print, and then enter a 4-  
digit personal identification number (PIN).  
Receive notification when someone prints a stored job  
Set the user name for a stored job  
In the Job Notification Options area, click Display Job ID  
when printing.  
In the User Name area, click User name to use the Windows  
default user name. To provide a different user name, click  
Custom and type the name.  
Specify a name for the stored job  
a) In the Job Name area, click Automatic to use the default  
job name. To specify a job name, click Custom and type the  
name. b) Select an option from the If job name exists drop-  
down list. Select Use Job Name + (1-99) to add a number to  
the end of the existing name, or select Replace Existing  
File to overwrite a job that already has that name.  
Obtain support and product-status information  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Services tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Obtain support information for the product and order supplies In the Internet Services drop-down list, select a support  
online option, and click Go!  
Check the status of the product, including the level of supplies Click the Device and Supplies Status icon. The Device  
Status page of the HP embedded Web server opens.  
Set advanced printing options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Advanced tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Select advanced printing options  
In any of the sections, click a current setting to activate a drop-  
down list so you can change the setting.  
102 Chapter 7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Change the number of copies that are printed  
Open the Paper/Output section, and then enter the number of  
copies to print. If you select 2 or more copies, you can select  
the option to collate the pages.  
NOTE: If the software program that you are using does not  
provide a way to print a particular number of copies, you can  
change the number of copies in the driver.  
Changing this setting affects the number of copies for all print  
jobs. After your job has printed, restore this setting to the  
original value.  
Print colored text as black rather than as shades of gray  
a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the  
Printer Features section. b) In the Print All Text as Black  
drop-down list, select Enabled.  
Load letterhead or preprinted paper the same way for every  
job, whether printing on one or both sides of the page  
a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the  
Printer Features section. b) In the Alternative Letterhead  
Mode drop-down list, select On. c) At the product, load the  
paper the same way you would for printing on both sides.  
Change the order in which pages are printed  
a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the  
Layout Options section. b) In the Page Order drop-down list,  
select Front to Back to print the pages in the same order as  
they are in the document, or select Back to Front to print the  
pages in the reverse order.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Windows printer driver 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Staple documents  
NOTE: Stapling features are only available if the stapler/stacker or multifunction finisher are attached  
to the MFP.  
Set the stapler at the control panel for printed jobs  
You can usually select the stapler in your software program or printer driver, although some options  
might be available only in the printer driver. See Change printer-driver settings for Windows  
on page 53 for more information. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or  
driver. If the stapler cannot be selected in the program or printer driver, it can be selected using the MFP  
control panel.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll to and touch Device Behavior.  
3. Scroll to and touch Stapler/Stacker or Multifunct. Finisher.  
4. Touch Staple.  
5. Touch the staple option you want to use.  
NOTE: Selecting the stapler at the printer control panel changes the default setting to Staple. It is  
possible that all print jobs will be stapled. However, settings that are changed in the printer driver override  
settings that are changed at the control panel.  
Set the stapler at the control panel for all copy jobs  
NOTE: The following procedure changes the default setting for all copy jobs.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Default Job Options.  
3. Touch Default Copy Options.  
4. Touch Staple/Collate.  
5. Touch Staple.  
6. Touch the staple option you want to use.  
Set the stapler at the control panel for a single copy job  
NOTE: The following procedure sets the stapling option for only the current copy job.  
1. Touch Copy.  
2. Touch Staple/Collate.  
3. Touch the staple option you want to use.  
104 Chapter 7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configure the device to stop or continue when the staple cartridge is empty  
You can specify whether the MFP stops printing when the staple cartridge is empty or if it continues  
printing but does not staple the jobs.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll to and touch Device Behavior.  
3. Scroll to and touch Stapler/Stacker or Multifunct. Finisher.  
4. Touch Staples Out.  
5. Touch the option that you want to use:  
Select Stop to stop all printing until the staple cartridge is replaced.  
Select Continue to continue printing jobs without stapling them.  
Load staples  
Load staples if the MFP control-panel display prompts you with a Stapler Low On Staples or Order  
staple cartridge message (the stapler has fewer than 20 usable staples left), or when it prompts you  
with a Replace Stapler Cartridge or STAPLER OUT OF STAPLES message (the stapler is empty, or  
the remaining staples cannot be used).  
The stapler accepts print jobs if it is out of staples, but it does not staple the pages. The printer driver  
can be configured to disable the staple option when the stapler cartridge is empty.  
Load staples in the stapler/stacker  
1. Move the stapler/stacker away from the MFP.  
Figure 7-1 Load staples in the stapler/stacker (1 of 5)  
2. Open the stapler unit door.  
Figure 7-2 Load staples in the stapler/stacker (2 of 5)  
ENWW  
Staple documents 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. On the empty staple cartridge, pull up on the green tab, and then pull the empty cartridge out.  
Figure 7-3 Load staples in the stapler/stacker (3 of 5)  
4. Insert the new staple cartridge, and push down on the green tab so that the cartridge locks into  
place.  
Figure 7-4 Load staples in the stapler/stacker (4 of 5)  
5. Close the stapler unit door and push the stapler/stacker back into place.  
Figure 7-5 Load staples in the stapler/stacker (5 of 5)  
Load staples in the multifunction finisher  
1. Open the stapler unit door.  
Figure 7-6 Load staples in the multifunction finisher (1 of 8)  
106 Chapter 7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Slide the stapler unit toward you.  
Figure 7-7 Load staples in the multifunction finisher (2 of 8)  
3. Turn the large green knob until the blue dot appears in the window of the stapler unit.  
Figure 7-8 Load staples in the multifunction finisher (3 of 8)  
4. Turn the small green knob at the top of the stapler unit clockwise until the staple cartridge moves  
to the left of the stapler unit.  
Figure 7-9 Load staples in the multifunction finisher (4 of 8)  
CAUTION: The blue dot must appear in the window of the stapler unit before you remove the  
staple cartridge. If you try to remove the staple cartridge before the blue dot appears in the window,  
you could damage the finisher.  
5. On the empty staple cartridge, squeeze the tabs together and pull the empty cartridge out.  
Figure 7-10 Load staples in the multifunction finisher (5 of 8)  
ENWW  
Staple documents 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Insert the new staple cartridge so that it locks into place.  
Figure 7-11 Load staples in the multifunction finisher (6 of 8)  
7. Slide the stapler unit into the finisher.  
Figure 7-12 Load staples in the multifunction finisher (7 of 8)  
8. Close the stapler unit door and realign the multifunction finisher against the MFP.  
Figure 7-13 Load staples in the multifunction finisher (8 of 8)  
108 Chapter 7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cancel a print job  
You can stop a print request by using the control panel or by using the software program. For instructions  
about how to stop a print request from a computer on a network, see the online Help for the specific  
network software.  
NOTE: It can take some time for all printing to clear after you have canceled a print job.  
Stop the current print job from the control panel  
1. Press Stop on the control panel.  
2. On the touchscreen, on the Device Has Been Paused screen, touch Cancel current job.  
NOTE: If the print job is too far into the printing process, you might not have the option to cancel  
it.  
Stop the current print job from the software program  
A dialog box will appear briefly on the screen, giving you the option to cancel the print job.  
If several requests have been sent to the device through your software, they might be waiting in a print  
queue (for example, in Windows Print Manager). See the software documentation for specific  
instructions about canceling a print request from the computer.  
If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print spooler (Windows 2000 or XP), delete  
the print job there.  
Click Start and then click Printers. Double-click the device icon to open the print spooler. Select the  
print job that you want to cancel, and then press Delete. If the print job is not cancelled, you might need  
to shut down and restart the computer.  
ENWW  
Cancel a print job 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Print on envelopes  
Envelopes must be printed from tray 1, which holds up to 10 envelopes. Printing performance depends  
on the construction of the envelope. Always test a few sample envelopes before purchasing a large  
quantity. For envelope specifications, see Supported paper and print media sizes on page 81 or go to  
CAUTION: Envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, exposed self-stick adhesives, or  
other synthetic materials can severely damage the MFP. Do not use envelopes with pressure-sensitive  
adhesive.  
Use the following basic steps to print on envelopes.  
1. Load the envelopes in tray 1.  
2. Change the fuser levers.  
3. Send the print job.  
Load envelopes in tray 1  
1. Open tray 1, but do not pull out the extension. (Most envelopes feed best without the extension.  
However, oversize envelopes might need the extension.)  
Figure 7-14 Load envelopes in tray 1 (1 of 3)  
2. Load up to 10 envelopes in the center of tray 1 with the side to be printed on facing up, and the  
return-address end toward the MFP. Slide the envelopes into the MFP as far as they will go without  
forcing them.  
Figure 7-15 Load envelopes in tray 1 (2 of 3)  
110 Chapter 7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Adjust the guides to touch the envelope stack without bending the envelopes. Make sure that the  
envelopes fit under the tabs on the guides.  
Figure 7-16 Load envelopes in tray 1 (3 of 3)  
4. Change the fuser levers (see Change the fuser levers on page 111).  
Change the fuser levers  
1. Move the output device away from the MFP to gain access to the left door.  
Figure 7-17 Change the fuser levers (1 of 4)  
2. Open the left door.  
Figure 7-18 Change the fuser levers (2 of 4)  
WARNING! Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It can be hot.  
ENWW  
Print on envelopes 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Locate and lift up the two blue levers.  
NOTE: Return the fuser levers to the down position after printing on envelopes.  
CAUTION: Failure to return levers to the down position for standard paper types can result in  
poor print quality.  
Figure 7-19 Change the fuser levers (3 of 4)  
4. Close the left door.  
Figure 7-20 Change the fuser levers (4 of 4)  
5. Push the output device back into place.  
Print on envelopes from a program  
1. Load envelopes into tray 1.  
2. In your program or in the printer driver, select tray 1 as the source.  
3. Set the appropriate envelope size and type. For envelope specifications, see Supported paper and  
4. If your program does not automatically format for an envelope, specify “Portrait” for page  
orientation.  
CAUTION: To avoid a jam, do not remove or insert an envelope after you begin printing.  
5. Set margins to within 15 mm (0.6 inch) from the edge of the envelope. For best print quality, set  
margins for a return and mailing address (typical address margins for a Commercial #10 or DL  
envelope are offered). Avoid printing over the area where the three back flaps meet on the back  
of an envelope.  
6. Select the left bin as the output location.  
7. When finished printing on envelopes, return the fuser levers to the down position.  
CAUTION: Failure to return levers to the down position for standard paper types can result in poor  
print quality.  
112 Chapter 7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Job storage features for print  
The following job-storage features are available for print jobs:  
Proof and hold jobs: This feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of  
a job and then print the additional copies.  
Personal jobs: When you send a private job to the device, the job does not print until you provide  
the required personal identification number (PIN) at the control panel.  
Stored jobs: You can store a job such as a personnel form, time sheet, or calendar on the device  
and allow other users to print the job at any time. Stored jobs also can be protected by a PIN.  
Follow the instructions in this section to gain access to the job storage features at the computer. See  
the specific section for the type of job that you want to create.  
CAUTION: If you turn off the device, all proof-and-hold and personal jobs are deleted.  
Gain access to the job storage features for print  
For Windows  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Click Properties, and then click the Job Storage tab.  
3. Select the job storage mode that you want.  
For Macintosh  
In newer drivers: Select Job Storage in the pull-down menu in the Print dialog box. In older drivers,  
select Printer Specific Options.  
ENWW  
Job storage features for print 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Use the proof and hold feature  
The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a job.  
To permanently store the job and prevent the device from deleting it when space is needed for something  
else, select the Stored Job option in the driver.  
Create a proof and hold job  
CAUTION: If the device needs additional space to store newer proof and hold jobs, the device deletes  
other stored proof and hold jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent  
the device from deleting it when space is needed, select the Stored Job option in the driver instead of  
the Proof and Hold option.  
In the driver, select the Proof and Hold option and type a user name and job name.  
The device prints one copy of the job for you to proof.  
Print the remaining copies of a proof and hold job  
At the device control panel, use the following procedure to print the remaining copies of a job held on  
the hard disk.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the job that you want to print.  
5.  
Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print. Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to  
print the document.  
Delete a proof and hold job  
When you send a proof and hold job, the device automatically deletes your previous proof and hold job.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the job that you want to delete.  
5. Touch Delete.  
6. Touch Yes.  
Use the personal job feature  
Use the personal printing feature to specify that a job is not printed until you release it. First, set a 4-  
digit PIN by typing the PIN in the printer driver. The PIN is sent to the device as part of the print job.  
After you have sent the print job to the device, you must use the PIN to print the job.  
114 Chapter 7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Create a personal job  
To specify that a job is personal, in the driver, select the Personal Job option, type a user name and job  
name, and then type a four-digit PIN into the Make Job Private field. The job will not print until you enter  
the PIN at the device control panel.  
Print a personal job  
You can print a personal job at the control panel after the job has been sent to the device.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the personal job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the personal job that you want to print.  
NOTE: A personal job will have a  
5. Touch the PIN field.  
[lock symbol] next to it.  
6. Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN, and then touch OK.  
7. Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print.  
8.  
Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.  
Delete a personal job  
A personal job is automatically deleted from the device hard disk after you release it for printing. If you  
want to delete the job without printing it, use this procedure.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the personal job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the personal job that you want to delete.  
NOTE: A personal job will have a  
5. Touch the PIN field.  
[lock symbol] next to it.)  
6. Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN, and then touch OK.  
7. Touch Delete.  
Use the QuickCopy feature  
The QuickCopy feature prints the requested number of copies of a job and stores a copy on the device  
hard disk. Additional copies of the job can be printed later. This feature can be turned off in the printer  
driver.  
The default number of different QuickCopy jobs that can be stored on the device is 32. At the control  
panel, you can set a different default number. See Navigate the Administration menu on page 15.  
ENWW  
Job storage features for print 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Create a QuickCopy job  
CAUTION: If the device needs additional space to store newer QuickCopy jobs, the device deletes  
other stored QuickCopy jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent the  
device from deleting it when space is needed, select the Job Storage option in the driver instead of the  
QuickCopy option.  
In the driver, select the QuickCopy option, and then type a user name and a job name.  
When you send the job to print, the device prints the number of copies that you set in the driver. To print  
more quick copies at the device control panel, see Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job  
Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job  
This section describes how to print additional copies of a job stored on the device hard disk at the control  
panel.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the job that you want to print.  
5. Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print.  
6.  
Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.  
Delete a QuickCopy job  
Delete a QuickCopy job at the device control panel when you no longer need it. If the device requires  
additional space to store new QuickCopy jobs, the device automatically deletes other stored QuickCopy  
jobs, starting with the oldest job.  
NOTE: Stored QuickCopy jobs can be deleted at the control panel or in HP Web Jetadmin.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the job that you want to delete.  
5. Touch Delete.  
6. Touch Yes.  
Use the stored job feature  
You can save a print job to the device hard disk without printing it. You can then print the job at any time  
at the device control panel. For example, you might want to download a personnel form, calendar, time  
sheet, or accounting form that other users can print when they need it.  
116 Chapter 7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Create a stored print job  
In the driver, select the Stored Job option, and then type a user name and job name. The job does not  
print until someone requests it at the device control panel.  
Print a stored print job  
At the control panel, you can print a job that is stored on the device hard disk.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to print.  
5.  
Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.  
6. Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print.  
7.  
Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.  
If the file has  
(lock symbol) next to it, the job is a private job and requires a PIN.  
Delete a stored print job  
Jobs stored on the device hard disk can be deleted at the control panel.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to delete.  
5. Touch Delete.  
6. Touch Yes.  
If the file has  
(lock symbol) next to it, the job requires a PIN to delete it.  
ENWW  
Job storage features for print 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
118 Chapter 7 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Copy  
This device can function as a standalone, walk-up copier. It is not necessary to install the printing system  
software on the computer; you can adjust the copy settings at the control panel. You can also copy  
originals by using either the document feeder or the scanner glass.  
This chapter provides information about how to make copies and how to change copy settings, including  
the following topics:  
It is recommended that you review the basic control-panel information before using the device copying  
functions. See Use the control panel on page 12 for more information.  
ENWW  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use the Copy screen  
From the Home screen, touch Copy to view the Copy screen. Note that only the first six copy features  
are immediately visible. In order to view additional copy features, touch More Options.  
Figure 8-1 Copy screen  
120 Chapter 8 Copy  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Set the default copy options  
You can use the administration menu to establish default settings that apply to all copy jobs. If necessary,  
you can override most settings for an individual job. After that job is complete, the device returns to the  
default settings.  
1. From the Home screen, scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Default Job Options, and then touch Default Copy Options.  
3. Several options are available. You can configure defaults for all options, or for only some options.  
For information about each option, see Adjust the copy settings on page 123. The built-in Help  
system also provides an explanation of each option. Touch the Help button ( ) in the upper-right  
corner of the screen.  
4.  
To exit the administration menu, touch the Home button ( ) in the upper-left corner of the screen.  
ENWW  
Set the default copy options 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic copy instructions  
This section provides the basic instructions for copying.  
Copy from the scanner glass  
Use the scanner glass to make as many as 999 copies of small, lightweight media or heavy media. This  
includes media such as receipts, newspaper clippings, photographs, old documents, worn documents,  
and books.  
Place original documents face-down on the glass. Align the corner of the original with the upper-left  
corner of the glass.  
To make copies by using the default copy options, use the numeric keypad on the control panel to select  
the number of copies, and press Start. To use customized settings, touch Copy. Specify the settings,  
and then press Start. For more information about using customized settings, see Adjust the copy settings  
Copy from the document feeder  
Use the document feeder to make as many as 999 copies of a document that has up to 50 pages  
(depending on the thickness of the pages). Place the document into the document feeder with the pages  
facing down.  
To make copies by using the default copy options, use the numeric keypad on the control panel to select  
the number of copies, and press Start. To use customized settings, touch Copy. Specify the settings,  
and then press Start. For more information about using customized settings, see Adjust the copy settings  
122 Chapter 8 Copy  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Adjust the copy settings  
The device offers several features so you can optimize copied output. These features are all available  
on the Copy screen.  
The Copy screen consists of several pages. From the first page, touch More Options to go to the next  
page. Then touch the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to other pages.  
For details about how to use an option, touch the option, and then touch the help ( ) button in the upper-  
right corner of the screen. The following table provides an overview of the copy options.  
NOTE: Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, some of these options  
might not appear. The options in the table are listed in the order in which they can appear.  
Option name  
Description  
Sides  
Use this feature to indicate whether the original document is printed on one or both sides, and  
whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Use this feature to reduce or enlarge the copied image on the page.  
Staple/Collate or Collate  
If the optional HP Stapler/Stacker or HP Multifunction Finisher is attached, the Staple/Collate  
option is available. Use this feature to set up options for stapling and assembling the pages in  
sets of copies.  
If the optional HP Stapler/Stacker or HP Multifunction Finisher is not attached, the Collate option  
is available. Use this feature to assemble each set of copied pages in the same order as the  
original document.  
Paper Selection  
Use this feature to select the tray that holds the size and type of paper that you want to use.  
Image Adjustment  
Use this feature to improve the overall quality of the copy. For example, you can adjust the  
darkness and sharpness, and you can use the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint  
images from the background or to remove a light background color.  
Content Orientation  
Use this feature to specify the way the content of the original page is placed on the page: portrait  
or landscape.  
Output Bin  
Use this feature to select an output bin for the copies.  
Optimize Text/Picture  
Use this feature to optimize the output for a particular type of content. You can optimize the  
output for text or printed pictures, or you can manually adjust the values.  
Pages per Sheet  
Original Size  
Use this feature to copy multiple pages onto one sheet of paper.  
Use this feature to describe the page size of the original document.  
Booklet Format  
Use this feature to copy two or more pages onto one sheet of paper so you can fold the sheets  
in the center to form a booklet.  
Edge-To-Edge  
Job Build  
Use this feature to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original  
document is printed close to the edges. Combine this feature with the Reduce/Enlarge feature  
to ensure that the entire page is printed on the copies.  
Use this feature to combine several sets of original documents into one copy job. Also use this  
feature to copy an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can  
accommodate at one time.  
ENWW  
Adjust the copy settings 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copy two-sided documents  
Two-sided documents can be copied manually or automatically.  
Copying two-sided documents manually  
Copies resulting from this procedure are printed on one side, and need to be hand-collated.  
1. Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder input tray with the first page facing  
down, and with the top of the page leading into the document feeder.  
2. Touch Start Copy. The odd-numbered pages are copied and printed.  
3. Remove the stack from the document feeder output tray and reload the stack with the last page  
facing down, and with the top of the page leading into the document feeder.  
4. Touch Start Copy. The even-numbered pages are copied and printed.  
5. Collate the odd- and even-numbered printed copies.  
Figure 8-2 Collate copies  
Copy two-sided documents automatically  
The default copy setting is one-sided to one-sided. Use the following procedures to change the setting  
so you can copy from or to documents that are two-sided.  
Make two-sided copies from one-sided documents  
1. Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing down, and  
with the top of the page leading.  
2. On the control panel, touch Copy.  
3. Touch Sides.  
4. Touch 1-sided original, 2-sided output.  
5. Touch OK.  
6. Touch Start Copy.  
Make two-sided copies from two-sided documents  
1. Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing down, and  
with the top of the page leading.  
2. On the control panel, touch Copy.  
3. Touch Sides.  
124 Chapter 8 Copy  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4. Touch 2-sided original, 2-sided output.  
5. Touch OK.  
6. Touch Start Copy.  
Make one-sided copies from two-sided documents  
1. Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing down, and  
with the top of the page leading.  
2. On the control panel, touch Copy.  
3. Touch Sides.  
4. Touch 2-sided original, 1-sided output.  
5. Touch OK.  
6. Touch Start Copy.  
ENWW  
Copy two-sided documents 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copy mixed-size originals  
You can copy original documents that are printed on different sizes of paper as long as the sheets of  
paper have one common dimension. For example, you could combine letter and legal sizes, or you could  
combine A4 and A5 sizes.  
1. Arrange the sheets in the original document so they all have the same width.  
2. Place the sheets face-down into the document feeder, and adjust both paper guides against the  
document.  
3. From the Home screen, touch Copy.  
4. Touch Original Size.  
NOTE: If this option is not on the first screen, touch More Options until the option appears.  
5. Select Mixed Ltr/Lgl, and then touch OK.  
6. Touch Start Copy.  
126 Chapter 8 Copy  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Change the copy-collation setting  
You can set the device to automatically collate multiple copies into sets. For example, if you are making  
two copies of three pages and the automatic collation is on, the pages print in this order: 1,2,3,1,2,3. If  
automatic collation is off, the pages print in this order: 1,1,2,2,3,3.  
To use the automatic collation, the original document size must fit into the memory. If it does not, the  
device makes only one copy and a message appears notifying you of the change. If that happens, use  
one of the following methods to finish the job:  
Split the job into smaller jobs that contain fewer pages.  
Make only one copy of the document at a time.  
Turn off the automatic collation.  
The collation setting you select is in effect for all copies until you change the setting. The default setting  
for automatic copy collation is On.  
1. On the control panel, touch Copy.  
2. Touch Staple/Collate or Collate.  
3. Touch Off.  
4. Touch OK.  
ENWW  
Change the copy-collation setting 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copy photos and books  
Copy a photo  
NOTE: Photos should be copied from the flatbed scanner, not from the document feeder.  
1. Lift the lid and place the photo on the flatbed scanner with the picture-side down and the upper-  
left corner of the photo in the upper-left corner of the glass.  
2. Gently close the lid.  
3. Touch Start Copy.  
Copy a book  
1. Place the book face down on the glass with the top edge toward the rear of the glass. Align the  
book spine with the book icon  
2. Touch Copy.  
3. Scroll to and touch Book Copy.  
along the top edge of the glass.  
4. Touch Book Copy On and then touch OK.  
5. Select the number of copies to make and adjust other settings as needed.  
6. Touch Start Copy, or press the Start button on the control panel.  
7. Select which pages of the book should be copied:  
Copy both pages copies the images on both the left and right side of the spine  
Skip left page copies the image on the right side of the spine only  
Skip right page copies the image on the left side of the spine only  
8. Touch Scan.  
9. After the last page is scanned, touch Finish.  
128 Chapter 8 Copy  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Combine copy jobs by using Job Build  
Use the Job Build feature to build a single copy job from multiple scans. You can use either the document  
feeder or the scanner glass. The settings for the first scan are used for subsequent scans.  
1. Touch Copy.  
2. Scroll to and touch Job Build.  
3. Touch Job Build On.  
4. Touch OK.  
5. If necessary, select the desired copy options.  
6. Touch Start Copy. After each page is scanned, the control panel prompts you for more pages.  
7. If the job contains more pages, load the next page, and then touch Scan.  
The product temporarily saves all the scanned images. The product will begin printing copies when  
it has enough information to begin. Touch Finished to finish printing the copies.  
NOTE: In Job Build, if you scan the first page of a document by using the document feeder, then you  
must scan all of the pages in that document by using the document feeder. If you scan the first page of  
a document by using the scanner glass, then you must scan all of the pages in that document by using  
the scanner glass.  
ENWW  
Combine copy jobs by using Job Build 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cancel a copy job  
To cancel the copy job that is currently running, touch Stop on the control panel. This pauses the device.  
Then touch Cancel Current Job.  
NOTE: If you cancel a copy job, clear the document from the flatbed scanner or from the automatic  
document feeder.  
130 Chapter 8 Copy  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Job storage features for copy  
You can create a stored copy job at the device control panel that can be printed at a later time.  
Create a stored copy job  
1. Place the original document face-down on the glass or face-down in the ADF.  
2. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
3. Touch the Create tab.  
4. Specify the name for the stored job in one of these ways:  
Select an existing folder from the list. Touch New Job and type a job name.  
Touch the box below the existing Folder Name: or Job Name: on the right-hand side of the  
screen, and then edit the text.  
5. A private stored job has a lock icon next to the name, and it requires that you specify a PIN to  
retrieve it. To make the job private, select PIN to Print and then type the PIN for the job. Touch  
OK.  
6. Touch More Options to view and change other job storage options.  
7.  
After all the options are set, touch Create Stored Job ( ) in the upper-left corner of the screen to  
scan the document and store the job. The job is saved on the device until you delete it, so you can  
print it as often as necessary.  
Print a stored copy job  
At the control panel, you can print a job that is stored on the device hard disk.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to print.  
5.  
Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.  
6. Touch the Copies field to change the number of copies to print.  
7.  
Touch Retrieve Stored Job ( ) to print the document.  
If the file has  
(lock symbol) next to it, the job is a private job and requires a PIN.  
Delete a stored copy job  
Jobs stored on the device hard disk can be deleted at the control panel.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job.  
ENWW  
Job storage features for copy 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to delete.  
5. Touch Delete.  
6. Touch Yes.  
If the file has  
(lock symbol) next to it, the job requires a PIN to delete it.  
132 Chapter 8 Copy  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Scan and send to e-mail  
The MFP offers color-scanning and digital-sending capabilities. By using the control panel, you can scan  
black-and-white or color documents and send them to an e-mail address as an e-mail attachment. To  
use digital sending, the device must be connected to a local area network (LAN).  
NOTE: The e-mail icon is not shown on the control panel if e-mail is not configured.  
ENWW  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configure the device to send e-mail  
Before you can send a document to e-mail, you must configure the device.  
NOTE: The instructions that follow are for configuring the device at the control panel. You can also  
perform these procedures by using the embedded Web server. For more information, see  
Supported protocols  
The HP LaserJet M9040 and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP models support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol  
(SMTP) and Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).  
SMTP (e-mail gateway)  
SMTP is a set of rules that define the interaction between programs that send and receive e-mail.  
In order for the device to send documents to e-mail, it must be connected to a LAN that has access  
to an e-mail server that supports SMTP. The SMTP server must also have Internet access.  
If you are using a LAN connection, contact your system administrator to obtain the IP address or  
host name for your SMTP server. If you are connecting through a DSL or cable connection, contact  
the internet service provider to obtain the SMTP server IP address.  
LDAP  
LDAP is used to gain access to a database of information. When the device uses LDAP, it searches  
a global list of e-mail addresses. As you begin to type the e-mail address, LDAP uses an auto-  
complete feature that supplies a list of e-mail addresses that match the characters you type. As  
you type additional characters, the list of matching e-mail addresses becomes smaller.  
The device supports LDAP, but a connection to an LDAP server is not required in order for the  
device to be able to send to e-mail.  
NOTE: If you need to change the LDAP settings, you must change them by using the embedded  
Web server. For more information, see Embedded Web server on page 152, or see the Embedded  
Web Server User Guide on the device CD.  
Configure e-mail server settings  
Find the IP address for the SMTP server by touching the Network Address button on the control-panel  
home screen or by consulting your system administrator. Then use the following procedures to manually  
configure and test the IP address.  
Configure the SMTP gateway address  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch E-mail Setup, and then touch SMTP Gateway.  
4. Type the SMTP gateway address, either as an IP address or as a fully qualified domain name. If  
you do not know the IP address or domain name, contact the network administrator.  
5. Touch OK.  
134 Chapter 9 Scan and send to e-mail  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Test the SMTP settings  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch E-mail Setup, and then touch Test Send Gateway.  
If the configuration is correct, Gateways OK appears on the control-panel display.  
If the first test was successful, send an e-mail to yourself by using the digital-send feature. If you receive  
the e-mail, you have successfully configured the digital-sending feature.  
If you do not receive the e-mail, use these actions to resolve issues with the digital-sending software:  
Check the SMTP and address to make sure that you typed them correctly.  
Print a configuration page. Verify that the SMTP gateway address is correct.  
Make sure that the network is operating correctly. Send an e-mail to yourself from a computer. If  
you receive the e-mail, the network is operating correctly. If you do not receive the e-mail, contact  
your network administrator or Internet service provider (ISP).  
Run the DISCOVER.EXE file. This program attempts to find the gateway. You can download the  
ENWW  
Configure the device to send e-mail 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use the Send E-mail screen  
Use the touchscreen to navigate through the options on the Send E-mail screen.  
1
Send E-mail button  
Touching this button scans the document and sends an e-mail file to the provided e-mail  
addresses.  
2
3
Home button  
From: field  
Touching this button opens the Home screen.  
Touch this field to open the keyboard, and then type your e-mail address. If the system  
administrator has configured the device to do so, this field might automatically insert a default  
address.  
4
To: field  
Touch this field to open the keyboard, and then type the e-mail addresses of those whom you  
want to receive the scanned document.  
5
6
7
Subject: field  
Touch this field to open the keyboard, and then type a subject title.  
More Options button  
Scroll bar  
Touch this button to change certain e-mail settings for the current scan job.  
Use the scroll bar to view and set up the CC:, BCC:, Message, and File Name fields. Touch any  
of those fields to open the keyboard and add the necessary information.  
8
9
Address book buttons Touch these buttons to use the address book to populate the To:, CC:, or BCC: fields. For more  
Help button  
Touch this button for control-panel help. For more information, see Use the control panel  
10 Error/warning button  
This button appears only when there is an error or warning in the status line area. Touch it to open  
a pop-up screen that will help you resolve the error or warning.  
136 Chapter 9 Scan and send to e-mail  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Perform basic e-mail functions  
The device e-mail feature offers the following benefits:  
Sends documents to multiple e-mail addresses, saving time and delivery costs.  
Delivers files in black-and-white or in color. Files can be sent in different file formats that the  
recipient can manipulate.  
With e-mail, documents are scanned into the device memory and sent to an e-mail address or multiple  
addresses as an e-mail attachment. Digital documents can be sent in several graphics formats, such  
as .TFF and .JPG, which allows recipients to manipulate the document file in various programs to meet  
their specific needs. Documents arrive in near-original quality, and then can be printed, stored, or  
forwarded.  
In order to use the e-mail feature, the device needs to be connected to a valid SMTP local area network  
that includes Internet access.  
Load documents  
You can scan a document by using either the glass or the ADF. The glass and ADF can accommodate  
Executive / A5 to Ledger (LDR, 11x17) / A3. Smaller originals, receipts, irregular and worn documents,  
stapled documents, previously folded documents, and photographs should be scanned by using the  
glass. Multiple-page documents can be scanned easily by using the ADF.  
Send documents  
The device scans both black-and-white and color originals. You can use default settings or change the  
scanning preferences and file formats. The following are the default settings:  
Color  
PDF (requires the recipient to have an Adobe Acrobat viewer to view the e-mail attachment)  
For information about changing the settings for the current job, see Change e-mail settings for the current  
Send a document  
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-down in the ADF.  
2. From the Home screen, touch E-mail.  
3. If prompted, type your user name and password.  
4. Complete the From:, To:, and Subject: fields. Scroll down and complete the CC:, BCC:, and  
Message fields if appropriate. Your user name or other default information might appear in the  
From: field. If so, you might not be able to change it.  
5. (Optional) Touch More Options to change the settings for the document that you are sending (for  
example, the document’s original size). If you are sending a two-sided document, you should select  
Sides and an option with a two-sided original.  
6. Press Start to begin sending.  
7. When you are finished, remove the original document from the scanner glass, ADF, or output bin.  
ENWW  
Perform basic e-mail functions 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Use the auto-complete function  
When you type characters into the To:, CC:, or From: fields on the Send E-mail screen, the auto-  
complete function is activated. As you type the required address or name by using the keyboard screen,  
the device automatically searches the address book list and completes the address or name by using  
the first match. You can then select that name by touching Enter, or continue typing the name until auto-  
complete finds the correct entry. If you type a character that does not match any entry in the list, the  
auto-complete text is removed from the display to indicate that you are typing an address that is not in  
the address book.  
138 Chapter 9 Scan and send to e-mail  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use the address book  
You can send e-mail to a list of recipients by using the address book feature of the device. See your  
system administrator for information about configuring address lists.  
NOTE: You can also use the embedded Web server (EWS) to create and manage the e-mail address  
book. The EWS e-mail address book can be used to add, edit, or delete single e-mail addresses or e-  
mail distribution lists. For more information, see Embedded Web server on page 152.  
Create a recipient list  
1. From the Home screen, touch E-mail.  
2. Complete one of the following steps:  
Touch To: to open the keyboard screen, and then type the recipients' e-mail addresses.  
Separate multiple e-mail addresses with a semicolon or by touching Enter on the touchscreen.  
Use the address book.  
a.  
On the Send E-mail screen, touch the address book button ( ) to open the address  
book.  
b. Navigate the entries in the address book by using the scroll bar. Hold down the arrow to  
scroll quickly through the list.  
c.  
Highlight the name to select a recipient, and then touch the add button ( ).  
You can also select a distribution list by touching the drop-down list at the top of the  
screen and then touching All, or add a recipient from a local list by touching Local in the  
drop-down list. Highlight the appropriate names, and then touch  
your list of recipients.  
to add the name to  
You can remove a recipient from your list by scrolling to highlight the recipient, and then  
touching the remove button ( ).  
3. The names in the recipient list are placed in the text line of the keyboard screen. If you want, you  
can add a recipient that is not found in the address book by typing the e-mail address on the  
keyboard. After you are satisfied with your recipient list, touch OK.  
4. Touch OK.  
5. Finish typing information in the CC: and Subject: fields on the Send E-mail screen, if necessary.  
You can check the list of recipients by touching the down arrow in the To: text line.  
6. Press Start.  
Use the local address book  
Use the local address book to store frequently-used e-mail addresses. The local address book can be  
shared between devices that use the same server to gain access to the HP Digital Sending software.  
You can use the address book when you type e-mail addresses in the From:, To:, CC:, or BCC: fields.  
You can also add or delete addresses in the address book.  
To open the address book, touch the address book button ( ).  
ENWW  
Use the address book 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Add e-mail addresses to the local address book  
1. Touch Local.  
2.  
Touch  
.
3. (Optional) Touch the Name field, and in the keyboard that appears type a name for the new entry.  
Touch OK.  
The name is the alias for the e-mail address. If you do not type an alias name, the alias will be the  
e-mail address itself.  
4. Touch the Address field, and in the keyboard that appears type the e-mail address for the new  
entry. Touch OK.  
Delete e-mail addresses from the local address book  
You can delete e-mail addresses that you no longer use.  
NOTE: To change an e-mail address, you must first delete the address and then add the corrected  
address as a new address in the local address book.  
1. Touch Local.  
2. Touch the e-mail address that you want to delete.  
3.  
Touch  
The following confirmation message appears: Do you want to delete the selected address(es)?  
4. Touch Yes to delete the e-mail address(es) or touch No to return to the Address Book screen.  
.
140 Chapter 9 Scan and send to e-mail  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Change e-mail settings for the current job  
Use the More Options button to change the following e-mail settings for the current print job:  
Button  
Description  
Document File Type Touch this button to change the type of file the device creates after scanning the document.  
Output Quality  
Touch this button to increase or decrease the print quality of the file being scanned. A higher quality  
setting produces a larger file size.  
Resolution  
Touch this button to change the scan resolution. A higher resolution setting produces a larger file size.  
Touch this button to determine whether you will scan the document in color or in black-and-white.  
Touch this button to indicate if the original document is one-sided or two-sided.  
Color/Black  
Original Sides  
Content Orientation Touch this button to select either the portrait or landscape orientation for the original.  
Original Size  
Touch this button to select the size of the document: letter, A4, legal, or mixed letter/legal.  
Optimize Text/  
Picture  
Touch this button to change the scanning procedure based on the type of document that you are  
scanning.  
Job Build  
Touch this button to activate or deactivate the Job Build mode, which enables you to scan several small  
scan jobs and send them as one file.  
Image Adjustment  
Touch this button to change the darkness and sharpness settings, or to clean up background clutter on  
the original.  
ENWW  
Change e-mail settings for the current job 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scan to a folder  
If the system administrator has made the feature available, the device can scan a file and send it to a  
folder on the network. Supported operating systems for folder destinations include Windows 2000,  
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Vista.  
NOTE: You might be required to supply a user name and password in order to use this option, or to  
send to certain folders. See your system administrator for more information.  
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-down in the ADF.  
2. From the Home screen, touch Network Folder.  
3. In the Quick Access Folders list, select the folder in which you want to save the document.  
4. Touch the File Name field to open the keyboard pop-up screen, and then type the file name.  
5. Touch Send to Network Folder.  
142 Chapter 9 Scan and send to e-mail  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scan to a workflow destination  
NOTE: This device feature is provided by the optional Digital Sending Software.  
If the system administrator has enabled the workflow functionality, you can scan a document and send  
it to a custom workflow destination. A workflow destination gives you the ability to send additional  
information, along with the scanned document, to a specified network or file transfer protocol (FTP)  
location. Prompts for specific information appear on the control-panel display. The system administrator  
can also designate a printer as a workflow destination, which allows you to scan a document and then  
send it directly to a network printer for printing.  
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-down in the ADF.  
2. From the Home screen, touch Workflow.  
3. Select the destination to which you want to scan.  
4. In the Text Field field, type the data that you want to accompany the file, and then touch Send  
Workflow.  
ENWW  
Scan to a workflow destination 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
144 Chapter 9 Scan and send to e-mail  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Fax  
ENWW  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Analog fax  
Add analog fax capabilities to the MFP by purchasing and installing the Analog Fax Accessory 300.  
When the analog fax accessory is installed, the MFP can function as a standalone fax machine. See  
Order parts, accessories, and supplies on page 240 for information about ordering the analog fax  
accessory. The Analog Fax Accessory 300 Fax Guide and the Analog Fax Accessory 300 Send Fax  
Driver Guide are available at www.hp.com/go/mfpfaxaccessory300.  
Connect the fax accessory to a phone line  
When connecting the fax accessory to a phone line, ensure that the phone line being used for the fax  
accessory is a dedicated line that is not used by any other devices. Also, this line should be an analog  
line because the fax will not function correctly if it is connected to some digital PBX systems. If you are  
not sure whether you have an analog or digital phone line, contact your telecom provider.  
NOTE: HP recommends using the phone cord that comes with the fax accessory to ensure that the  
accessory functions correctly.  
Follow these instructions to connect the fax accessory to a phone jack.  
1. Locate the phone cord that is included with the fax accessory kit. Connect one end of the phone  
cord into the fax accessory phone jack that is on the formatter. Push the connector until it clicks.  
Figure 10-1 Connect the fax accessory to a phone line  
CAUTION: Be sure to connect the phone line to the fax accessory port, which is located at the  
bottom of the formatter.  
2. Connect the other end of the phone cord into the phone jack on the wall. Push the connector until  
it clicks or until it is securely seated. Because different types of connectors are used in different  
countries/regions, the connector might not make an audible click.  
Configure and use the fax features  
Before you can use the fax features, you must configure them in the control-panel menus. For complete  
information about configuring and using the fax accessory, and for information about troubleshooting  
problems with the fax accessory, see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide. This  
guide is provided with the fax accessory.  
146 Chapter 10 Fax  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Use the Send Fax driver to send a fax from a computer without going to the MFP control panel. See the  
HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory 300 Send Fax Driver Guide for more information.  
ENWW  
Analog fax 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital fax  
Digital faxing is available when you install the optional HP Digital Sending Software. For information  
about ordering this software, go to http://www.hp.com/go/digitalsending.  
With digital faxing, the MFP does not need to be connected directly to a phone line. Instead, the MFP  
can send a fax in one of three ways:  
LAN fax sends faxes through a third-party fax provider.  
Microsoft Windows 2000 fax is a fax modem and Digital Sender Module on a computer that allows  
the computer to operate as a turnkey gateway fax.  
Internet fax uses an Internet fax provider to process faxes, and the fax is delivered on a traditional  
fax machine or sent to the user’s e-mail.  
For complete information about using digital faxing, see the documentation that is provided with the  
HP Digital Sending Software.  
148 Chapter 10 Fax  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Information pages  
Information pages provide details about the device and its current configuration. The following table  
provides the instructions for printing the information pages.  
Page description  
Menu map  
How to print the page from the MFP control panel  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
Shows the control-panel menus and  
available settings.  
3. Touch Configuration/Status Pages.  
4. Touch Administration Menu Map.  
5. Touch Print.  
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in  
the device.  
For a complete list of control panel menus and possible values, see Use the control  
Configuration page  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
Shows device settings and installed  
accessories.  
3. Touch Configuration/Status Pages.  
4. Touch Configuration Page.  
5. Touch Print.  
NOTE: If the device contains an HP Jetdirect print server or an optional hard disk  
drive, additional configuration pages print that provide information about those  
devices.  
Supplies status page  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
Shows status of print-cartridge life and 2. Touch Information.  
status of maintenance kit.  
3. Touch Configuration/Status Pages.  
4. Touch Supplies Status Page.  
5. Touch Print.  
NOTE: If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page might not show  
the remaining life for those supplies.  
Usage page  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
Shows a page count for each size of  
paper printed, the number of one-sided  
(simplexed) or two-sided (duplexed)  
pages, and the average percentage of  
coverage.  
3. Touch Configuration/Status Pages.  
4. Touch Usage Page.  
5. Touch Print.  
File directory  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
Contains information for any mass  
storage devices, such as flash drives,  
memory cards, or hard disks, that are  
installed in the device.  
3. Touch Configuration/Status Pages.  
150 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Page description  
Fax reports  
How to print the page from the MFP control panel  
4. Touch File Directory.  
5. Touch Print.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
Five reports show fax activity, fax calls, 2. Touch Information.  
billing codes, blocked fax numbers, and  
3. Touch Fax Reports.  
speed-dial numbers.  
4. Touch one of the following buttons to print the corresponding report:  
NOTE: Fax reports are available only  
on models that have the fax accessory  
installed.  
Fax Activity Log  
Fax Call Report  
Billing Codes Report  
Blocked Fax List  
Speed Dial List  
5. Touch Print.  
For more information, see the fax guide that came with the device.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
Font lists  
Shows which fonts are currently  
installed in the device.  
3. Touch Sample Pages/Fonts.  
4. Touch either PCL Font List or PS Font List.  
5. Touch Print.  
NOTE: The font lists also show which fonts reside on a hard disk accessory or  
DIMM.  
ENWW  
Information pages 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Embedded Web server  
Use the embedded Web server to view MFP and network status and to manage printing functions from  
your computer instead of from the MFP control panel. The following are examples of what you can do  
using the embedded Web server:  
NOTE: When the printer is directly connected to a computer, use the HP Easy Printer Care to view  
the printer status.  
View MFP status information.  
Set the type of media that is loaded in each tray.  
Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones.  
View and change tray configurations.  
View and change the MFP control-panel menu configuration.  
View and print internal pages.  
Receive notification of MFP and supplies events.  
View and change network configuration.  
To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or Netscape  
6.2 or later for Windows, Mac OS, and Linux (Netscape only). Netscape Navigator 4.7 is required for  
HP-UX 10 and HP-UX 11. The embedded Web server works when the MFP is connected to an IP-based  
network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based MFP connections. You do not have  
to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server.  
When the MFP is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available.  
NOTE: For complete information about using the embedded Web server, see the Embedded Web  
Server User Guide, which is on the HP LaserJet M9040 MFP and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP software  
CD.  
Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection  
1. In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the device IP address or host name in the  
address/URL field. To find the IP address or host name, print a configuration page. See Information  
NOTE: After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the  
future.  
2. The embedded Web server has four tabs that contain settings and information about the device:  
the Information tab, the Settings tab, the Networking tab, and the Digital Sending tab. Click the  
tab that you want to view.  
See Embedded Web server sections on page 153 for more information about each tab.  
152 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Embedded Web server sections  
Tab or section  
Options  
Information tab  
Device Status: Shows the device status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies,  
with 0% indicating that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of  
print paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change  
Settings.  
Provides device, status, and  
configuration information  
Configuration Page: Shows the information found on the configuration page.  
Supplies Status: Shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0 percent indicating  
that a supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers. To order new  
supplies, click Shop for Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the  
window.  
Event log: Shows a list of all device events and errors.  
Usage page: Shows a summary of the number of pages the device has printed,  
grouped by size and type.  
Device Information: Shows the device network name, address, and model  
information. To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab.  
Control Panel: Shows messages from the device control panel, such as Ready or  
Sleep mode on.  
Print: Allows you to send print jobs to the device.  
Settings tab  
Configure Device: Allows you to configure device settings. This page contains the  
traditional menus found on devices using a control-panel display.  
Provides the ability to configure the  
device from your computer  
Tray Sizes/Types: Allows you to assign paper sizes and paper types for each tray  
on the product.  
E-mail Server: Network only. Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up  
incoming and outgoing e-mail, as well as to set e-mail alerts.  
Alerts: Network only. Allows you to set up to receive e-mail alerts for various device  
and supplies events.  
AutoSend: Allows you to configure the device to send automated e-mails regarding  
device configuration and supplies to specific e-mail addresses.  
Security: Allows you to set a password that must be entered to gain access to the  
Settings and Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the  
embedded Web server.  
Authentication Manager: Allows you to determine which device functions will  
require a user to provide log-in information in order to use those functions.  
LDAP Authentication: Allows you to configure a Lightweight Directory Access  
Protocol (LDAP) server to limit device access to certain users. The LDAP server will  
require a user to provide log-in information in order to gain access to the device.  
Kerberos Authentication: Use the Kerberos Authentication page to configure the  
device to authenticate users to a Kerberos Realm. When Kerberos authentication is  
selected as the Log In Method for one or more Device Functions, the user at the  
device must enter valid credentials (username, password, and realm) to gain access  
to those functions.  
Device PIN: Allows you to limit access to one or more device functions using a  
Personal Identification Number (PIN).  
ENWW  
Embedded Web server 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Tab or section  
Options  
User PIN: Allows you to add user PIN records into the device, and to edit or delete  
user PIN records that have already been saved in the device. You can set up the  
device to require each user to provide their PIN when they access the device.  
Edit Other Links: Allows you to add or customize a link to another Web site. This  
link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages.  
Device Information: Allows you to name the device and assign an asset number to  
it. Enter the name and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive  
information about the device.  
Language: Allows you to determine the language in which to display the embedded  
Web server information.  
Date & Time: Allows time synchronization with a network time server.  
Wake Time: Allows you to set or edit a wake time for the device.  
NOTE: The Settings tab can be password-protected. If this device is on a network,  
always consult with the system administrator before changing settings on this tab.  
Digital Sending tab  
General Settings: Allows you to set digital-sending administrator information.  
Provides the ability to change  
digital sending settings from your  
computer  
Send to Folder: Allows you to send scanned documents to shared folders or FTP  
sites.  
E-mail Settings: Allows you to configure SMTP settings, set the maximum e-mail  
attachment size, and set the default e-mail address for the product. You can also set  
a default subject for all e-mail messages that the product sends.  
E-mail Address Book: Allows you to add e-mail addresses into the device, and to  
edit e-mail addresses that have already been saved in the device.  
Fax Address Book: Allows you to add fax numbers into the device, and to edit fax  
numbers that have already been saved in the device.  
Import/Export: Allows you to import and export address book and user information  
to and from the device.  
LDAP Settings: Allows you to configure a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol  
(LDAP) server to look up e-mail addresses.  
Log: Allows you to view digital sending job information, including any errors that  
occur.  
Preferences: Allows you to configure general settings for the digital-sending  
features.  
Networking tab  
Network administrators can use this tab to control network-related settings for the device  
when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not appear if the device is  
directly connected to a computer, or if the device is connected to a network using anything  
other than an HP Jetdirect print server.  
Provides the ability to change  
network settings from your  
computer  
NOTE: The Networking tab can be password-protected.  
Other links  
HP Instant Support™: Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions.  
This service analyzes your device error log and configuration information to provide  
diagnostic and support information specific to your device.  
Contains links that connect you to  
the Internet  
Shop for Supplies: Connects to the HP SureSupply Web site, where you will receive  
information on options for purchasing original HP supplies, such as print cartridges  
and paper.  
Product Support: Connects to the support site for the device, from which you can  
search for help regarding general topics.  
154 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Tab or section  
Options  
NOTE: You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links. If you use a  
dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server,  
you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that you  
close the embedded Web server and reopen it.  
ENWW  
Embedded Web server 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HP Easy Printer Care  
HP Easy Printer Care is a software program that you can use for the following tasks:  
Checking the device status  
Checking the supplies status  
Setting up alerts  
Viewing device documentation  
Gaining access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools  
Printing usage reports  
Fixing problems with HP drivers, software, and device firmware  
You can use the HP Easy Printer Care when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when  
it is connected to a network. You must perform a complete software installation to use the HP Easy  
Printer Care.  
NOTE: You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the HP Easy Printer Care. However,  
if you click a Web-based link, you must have Internet access to go to the site associated with the link.  
For more information on HP Easy Printer Care, visit http://www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare.  
Supported operating systems  
HP Easy Printer Care is supported for Windows 2000, Windows XP Service Pack 2 (Professional or  
Home), and Windows Vista.  
Open the HP Easy Printer Care software  
Use one of the following methods to open the HP Easy Printer Care software:  
On the Start menu, select Programs, select Hewlett-Packard, select HP Easy Printer Care, and  
then click Start HP Easy Printer Care.  
In the Windows system tray (in the lower-right corner of the desktop), double-click the HP Easy  
Printer Care icon.  
Double-click the desktop icon.  
HP Easy Printer Care software sections  
HP Easy Printer Care software can provide information about multiple HP products that are on your  
network as well as any products that are directly connected to your computer. Some of the items that  
are in the following table might not be available for every product.  
The Help button (?) in the upper-right corner of each page provides more detailed information about the  
options on that page.  
156 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Section  
Options  
Device List tab  
Devices list: Shows the products that you can select.  
When you open the software, this is the  
first page that appears.  
NOTE: The product information appears either in list form or as icons,  
depending on the setting for the View as option.  
NOTE: To return to this page from any  
tab, click My HP Printers in the left side  
of the window.  
The information on this tab includes current alerts for the product.  
If you click a product in the list, the HP Easy Printer Care opens the  
Overview tab for that product.  
Compatible Printers  
Provides a list of all the HP products that support HP Easy Printer Care software.  
Find Other Printers window  
Click the Find Other Printers link in the Devices list to open the Find Other  
Printers window. The Find Other Printers window provides a utility that detects  
other network printers so that you can add them to the My HP Printers list and then  
monitor those products from your computer.  
Add more products to the  
My HP Printers list  
Overview tab  
Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information  
and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as an empty  
print cartridge. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh  
Contains basic status information for the  
device  
button  
in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status.  
Supplies Status section: Shows detailed supplies status, such as the  
percentage of toner remaining in the print cartridge and the status of the paper  
that is loaded in each tray.  
Supplies Details link: Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed  
information about product supplies, ordering information, and recycling  
information.  
Support tab  
Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information  
and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as an empty  
print cartridge. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh  
Provides links to support information  
button  
in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status.  
Device Management section: Provides links to information about HP Easy  
Printer Care, to advanced product settings, and to product usage reports.  
Troubleshooting and Help: Provides links to tools that you can use to resolve  
problems, to online product support information, and to online HP experts.  
Settings tab  
About: Provides general information about this tab.  
Configure product settings, adjust print-  
quality settings, and find information  
about specific product features  
General: Provides information about the product, such as the model number,  
serial number, and the settings for date and time, if they are available.  
Information Pages: Provides links to print the information pages that are  
available for the product.  
NOTE: This tab is not available for  
some products.  
Capabilities: Provides information about product features, such as duplexing,  
the available memory, and the available printing personalities. Click Change  
to adjust the settings.  
Print Quality: Provides information about print-quality settings. Click  
Change to adjust the settings.  
Trays / Paper: Provides information about the trays and how they are  
configured. Click Change to adjust the settings.  
Restore Defaults: Provides a way to restore the product settings to the factory  
defaults. Click Restore to restore the settings to the defaults.  
HP Proactive Support  
When enabled, HP Proactive Support routinely scans your printing system to identify  
potential problems. Click the more info link to configure how frequently the scans  
occur. This page also provides information about available updates for product  
ENWW  
HP Easy Printer Care 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section  
Options  
NOTE: This item is available from the software, firmware, and HP printer drivers. You can accept or decline each  
Overview and Support tabs.  
Supplies Ordering button  
recommended update.  
Ordering list: Shows the supplies that you can order for each product. To order  
a certain item, click the Order check box for that item in the supplies list. You  
can sort the list by product, or by the supplies that need to be ordered the  
soonest. The list contains supplies information for every product that is in the  
My HP Printers list.  
Click the Supplies Ordering button on  
any tab to open the Supplies Ordering  
window, which provides access to online  
supplies ordering.  
Shop Online for Supplies button: Opens the HP SureSupply Web site in a  
new browser window. If you have checked the Order check box for any items,  
the information about those items can be transferred to the Web site, where  
you will receive information on options for purchasing your selected supplies.  
NOTE: This item is available from the  
Overview and Support tabs.  
Print Shopping List button: Prints the information for the supplies that have  
the Order check box selected.  
Alert Settings link  
Click Alert Settings to open the Alert Settings window, in which you can configure  
alerts for each product.  
NOTE: This item is available from the  
Overview and Support tabs.  
Alerting is on or off: Activates or deactivates the alerts feature.  
Printer Alerts: Select the option to receive alerts for critical errors only, or for  
any error.  
Job Alerts: For products that support it, you can receive alerts for specific print  
jobs.  
Color Access Control  
Use this feature to permit or restrict color printing.  
NOTE: This item is available only for  
HP color products that support Color  
Access Control.  
NOTE: This item is available from the  
Overview and Support tabs.  
158 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use HP Web Jetadmin software  
HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and  
troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. The intuitive browser interface simplifies cross-platform  
management of a wide range of devices, including HP and non-HP devices. Management is proactive,  
allowing network administrators the ability to resolve issues before users are affected. Download this  
free, enhanced-management software at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software.  
To obtain plug-ins to HP Web Jetadmin, click plug-ins, and then click the download link that is next to  
the name of the plug-in that you want. The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you  
when new plug-ins are available. On the Product Update page, follow the directions to automatically  
connect to the HP Web site.  
If installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin is available to any client through a supported Web  
browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows or Netscape Navigator 7.1 for Linux.  
Browse to the HP Web Jetadmin host.  
NOTE: Browsers must be Java-enabled. Browsing from an Apple PC is not supported.  
ENWW  
Use HP Web Jetadmin software 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh  
Use the optional HP Printer Utility to configure and maintain a printer from a Mac OS X V10.2, V10.3,  
or V10.4 computer. This section describes several functions that you can perform through the HP Printer  
Utility.  
Open the HP Printer Utility  
The process that you use to start the HP Printer Utility depends on the Macintosh operating system that  
you are using.  
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.2  
1. Open the Finder, and then click Applications.  
2. Click Library, and then click Printers.  
3. Click hp, and then click Utilities.  
4. Double-click HP Printer Selector to open the HP Printer Selector.  
5. Select the printer that you want to configure, and then click Utilities.  
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.3 or Mac OS X V10.4  
1. In the Dock, click the Printer Setup Utility icon.  
NOTE: If the Printer Setup Utility icon does not appear in the Dock, open the Finder, click  
Applications, click Utilities, and then double-click Printer Setup Utility.  
2. Select the printer that you want to configure, and then click Utilities.  
Print a cleaning page  
Print a cleaning page if the printer is not printing jobs at the expected quality level.  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Cleaning.  
3. Click Print Cleaning Page to print the cleaning page.  
Print a configuration page  
Print a configuration page to view the printer settings.  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Configuration Page.  
3. Click Print Configuration Page to print the configuration page.  
160 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
View supplies status  
View the status of the printer supplies (such as print cartridges, imaging drum, or print media) from a  
computer.  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Supplies Status.  
3. Click the Supplies tab to view the status of various replaceable supplies, and click the Media tab  
to view the status of print media.  
To view a more detailed status list, click Detailed Supplies Information. The Supplies  
Information dialog box appears.  
To order supplies online, click Order HP Supplies. You must have Internet access in order  
to use the online ordering Web page. For more information about online ordering, see Order  
Order supplies online and use other support features  
Use the HP Web site to order printer supplies, register the printer, get customer support, or learn about  
recycling printer supplies. You must have Internet access in order to use the supplies and support Web  
pages.  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select HP Support.  
3. Click one of the following buttons:  
Instant Support: Opens a Web page that you can use to seek technical assistance.  
Order Supplies Online: Opens a Web page that you can use to order printer supplies.  
Online Registration: Opens a Web page that you can use to register the printer.  
Return & Recycle: Opens a Web page that you can use to find information about recycling  
used supplies.  
Upload a file to the printer  
Send a file from the computer to the printer. The action that the printer takes depends on the type of file  
that is being sent to it. For example, when a print-ready file (such as a .PS or .PCL file) is sent, the printer  
prints the file.  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select File Upload.  
3. Click Choose, navigate to the file that you want to upload, and then click OK.  
4. Click Upload to load the file.  
ENWW  
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Update the firmware  
Update the printer firmware by loading the new firmware file from the computer. You can find new  
firmware files for your printer at www.hp.com/go/ljm9040mfp_firmware or www.hp.com/go/  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Firmware Update.  
3. Click Choose, navigate to the firmware file that you want to upload, and then click OK.  
4. Click Upload to load the firmware file.  
Activate the two-sided printing (duplexing) mode  
Turn on the two-sided printing feature on printers equipped with automatic duplexers.  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Duplex mode.  
3. Select Enable Duplex Mode to activate the two-sided printing mode, and then click Apply Now.  
Lock or unlock printer storage devices  
Manage access to printer storage devices from the computer.  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Lock Resources.  
3. On the Control Panel Access Level pop-up menu, select the access level that you want to set  
for the printer control panel.  
4. Select the devices that you want to lock, and clear any devices that you want to unlock.  
5. Click Apply Now.  
Save or print stored jobs  
Turn on the printer job-storing function, or print a stored job from the computer. You also can delete a  
stored print job.  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Stored Jobs.  
3. Perform any of the following tasks:  
To turn on the job-storing function, select Enable Job Storing, and then click Apply Now.  
To print a stored job, select a stored job in the list, type the necessary personal identification  
number (PIN) in the Enter Secure Job PIN box, type the number of copies that you want in  
the Copies To Print box, and then click Print.  
To delete a stored job, select a stored job in the list, and then click Delete.  
162 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configure trays  
Change the default printer tray settings from the computer.  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Tray Configuration.  
3. In the Trays list, select the tray to be configured.  
NOTE: To make the selected tray the default tray for printing, click Make Default.  
4. In the Default Media Size pop-up menu, select the default media size for the tray.  
5. In the Default Media Type pop-up menu, select the default media type for the tray.  
6. Click Apply Now.  
Change network settings  
Change the network internet protocol (IP) settings from the computer. You also can open the embedded  
Web server to change additional settings. For more information, see Embedded Web server  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select IP Settings.  
3. Change any of the settings in the following pop-up menus or fields:  
Configuration  
Host Name  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
If you want to change more settings in the embedded Web server, click Additional Network  
Settings. The embedded Web server opens with the Networking tab selected.  
4. Click Apply Now.  
Open the embedded Web server  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select Additional Settings.  
3. Click Open Embedded Web Server.  
ENWW  
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Set up e-mail alerts  
Set up e-mail messages that alert you to certain events that occur with the printer, such as a low toner  
level in a print cartridge.  
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.  
2. In the Configuration Settings list, select E-mail Alerts.  
3. Click the Server tab, and, in the SMTP Server box, type the server name.  
4. Click the Destination tab, click the add (+) button, and then type the e-mail addresses, mobile  
device numbers, or Web site URLs to which you want the e-mail alerts sent.  
NOTE: If your printer supports e-mail lists, you can make alerts lists for specific events the same  
way that you added e-mail addresses.  
5. Click the Events tab, and, in the list, define the events for which an e-mail alert should be sent.  
6. To test the alerts setup, click the Server tab, and then click Test. A sample message is sent to the  
defined e-mail addresses if the configuration is correct.  
7. Click Apply Now.  
164 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security features  
This section explains important security features that are available for the MFP:  
Secure the embedded Web server  
Assign a password for access to the embedded Web server so that unauthorized users cannot change  
the MFP settings.  
1. Open the embedded Web server. See Embedded Web server on page 152.  
2. Click the Settings tab.  
3. On the left side of the window, click Security.  
4. Type the password next to New Password, and type it again next to Verify Password.  
5. Click Apply. Make note of the password and store it in a safe place.  
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)  
The Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) provides a portal on the MFP. By using the FIH and third-party  
equipment, you can track information about copies that are made on the MFP.  
Requirements  
Windows 9X, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP  
Access to third-party accounting hardware solutions, such as Equitrac or Copitrak devices  
Use the FIH  
To use the FIH, you must download and install the FIH software. The software is available from  
to enable or disable the FIH portal. Use the software to set and change the administrator personal  
identification number (PIN).  
Administrators can use the PIN option to configure the FIH to prevent any unauthorized changes.  
Changes can be made only with the correct PIN authentication.  
NOTE: It is important to remember the PIN that is assigned to the FIH administration software. The  
PIN is required to make any changes to the FIH.  
ENWW  
Security features 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Enable the FIH portal  
1. Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.  
2. Click OK.  
3. Click Enable.  
4. If you have not entered a PIN before, click No. If you have entered a PIN before, click Yes. If you  
click No, type and confirm the PIN, and then click OK. If you click Yes, type the PIN and click  
OK.  
NOTE: The PIN must be numeric.  
5. Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network. If Direct is selected,  
type the MFP port. If Network is selected, type the IP address and port for the MFP.  
NOTE: The IP address for the MFP can be found on the Configuration page.  
If you typed an incorrect IP address, you will receive an error message. Otherwise, the portal is enabled.  
Disable the FIH portal  
1. Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.  
2. Click OK.  
3. Click Disable.  
4. Type the PIN and click OK.  
5. Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network. If Direct is selected,  
type the MFP port and click OK. If Network is selected, type the IP address and port for the MFP,  
and then click OK. The portal is disabled.  
NOTE: If you lose the PIN number and the portal needs to be disabled, try using the default PIN that  
is listed to disable it. For assistance, use the HP Instant Support service, which is available through the  
Secure Disk Erase  
To protect deleted data from unauthorized access on the MFP hard drive, use the Secure Disk Erase  
feature. This feature can securely erase print and copy jobs from the hard drive.  
Secure Disk Erase offers the following levels of disk security:  
Non-Secure Fast Erase. This is a simple file-table erase function. Access to the file is removed,  
but actual data is retained on the disk until it is overwritten by subsequent data-storage operations.  
This is the fastest mode. Non-Secure Fast Erase is the default erase mode.  
Secure Fast Erase. Access to the file is removed, and the data is overwritten with a fixed identical  
character pattern. This is slower than Non-Secure Fast Erase, but all data is overwritten. Secure  
Fast Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M requirements for the clearing of disk  
media.  
Secure Sanitizing Erase. This level is similar to the Secure Fast Erase mode. In addition, data is  
repetitively overwritten by using an algorithm that prevents any residual data persistence. This  
mode will impact performance. Secure Sanitizing Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense  
5220-22.M requirements for the sanitization of disk media.  
166 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Data affected  
Data affected (covered) by the Secure Disk Erase feature includes temporary files that are created  
during the print and copying process, stored jobs, proof and hold jobs, disk-based fonts, disk-based  
macros (forms), stored fax files, address books, and HP and third-party applications.  
NOTE: Stored jobs will be securely overwritten only when they have been deleted through the  
Retrieve Job menu on the MFP after the appropriate erase mode has been set.  
This feature will not impact data that is stored on flash-based product non-volatile RAM (NVRAM) that  
is used to store default settings, page counts, and similar data. This feature does not affect data that is  
stored on a system RAM disk (if one is used). This feature does not impact data that is stored on the  
flash-based system boot RAM.  
Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode does not overwrite previous data on the disk, nor does it  
immediately perform a full-disk sanitization. Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode changes how the  
MFP cleans up temporary data for jobs after the erase mode has been changed.  
Gain access to Secure Disk Erase  
Use HP Web Jetadmin to gain access to and set the Secure Disk Erase feature.  
Additional Information  
For additional information about the HP Secure Disk Erase feature, see the HP support flyer or go to  
Security Lock  
The security lock is a mechanical lock that is used to prevent the removal of internal computer  
components. Optional EIO accessories are not protected, however. Purchase the security lock  
assembly separately, and then install it on the MFP.  
Figure 11-1 Security lock  
Authentication  
This MFP offers several embedded authentication methods. These methods include Kerberos, LDAP,  
LDAP over SSL, and PIN.  
Optional HP Digital Send Software supports Windows SPNEGO, LDAP, LDAP over SSL, and Novell  
authentication.  
Lock the control-panel menus  
To prevent someone from changing the MFP configuration, you can lock the control-panel menus. This  
prevents unauthorized users from changing the configuration settings such as the SMTP server. The  
ENWW  
Security features 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
following procedure describes how to restrict access to the control-panel menus by using the HP Web  
Jetadmin software. (See Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 159.)  
1. Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.  
2. Open the DEVICE MANAGEMENT folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate  
to the DEVICE LISTS folder.  
3. Select the MFP.  
4. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Configure.  
5. Select Security from the Configuration Categories list.  
6. Type a Device Password.  
7. In the Control Panel Access section, select Maximum Lock. This prevents unauthorized users  
from gaining access to configuration settings.  
168 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Set the real-time clock  
Use the real-time clock feature to set the date and time settings. The date and time information is  
attached to stored print, fax, and digital-send jobs, so you can identify the most recent versions of stored  
print jobs.  
1. On the control panel, scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Time/Scheduling.  
3. Touch Date/Time.  
4. Choose a date format.  
5. Choose a time format.  
6. Touch the Date fields to enter the date.  
7. Touch the Time fields to enter the time.  
8. Touch Save.  
ENWW  
Set the real-time clock 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clean the MFP  
Print a cleaning page  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Print Quality.  
3. Touch Calibration/Cleaning.  
4. Touch Create Cleaning Page.  
The device prints a cleaning page.  
5. Follow the instructions printed on the cleaning page.  
Clean the MFP hardware  
To maintain print quality, clean the MFP thoroughly:  
every time you change the print cartridge  
whenever print-quality problems occur  
Clean the outside of the MFP with a lightly water-dampened cloth. Clean the inside with only a dry, lint-  
free cloth. Observe all warnings and cautions regarding the cleaning tasks.  
WARNING! Avoid touching the fusing area when cleaning the MFP. It can be hot.  
WARNING! Do not touch the transfer roller when cleaning the MFP.  
CAUTION: To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners  
on or around the MFP.  
Clean the paper path  
1. Before you begin these steps, turn the MFP off (button out) and disconnect all cables, including  
the power cord.  
Figure 11-2 Clean the paper path (1 of 6)  
170 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2. Open the front cover of the MFP, rotate the green lever downward to the unlocked position, and  
remove the print cartridge.  
Figure 11-3 Clean the paper path (2 of 6)  
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, use two hands when removing it from the  
MFP. Do not expose the print cartridge to light for more than a few minutes. Cover the print cartridge  
when it is outside of the MFP.  
NOTE: If toner gets on your clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth, and wash your clothes in cold  
water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
3. With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe any residue from the paper path area, the registration roller, and  
the print cartridge cavity.  
Figure 11-4 Clean the paper path (3 of 6)  
4. Replace the print cartridge.  
Figure 11-5 Clean the paper path (4 of 6)  
5. Rotate the green handle into the locked position.  
Figure 11-6 Clean the paper path (5 of 6)  
ENWW  
Clean the MFP 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Close the front cover, reconnect all cables, and turn the MFP on (button in).  
Figure 11-7 Clean the paper path (6 of 6)  
Clean the outside of the MFP  
Clean the outside of the MFP if it is visibly marked.  
Use a soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water.  
Clean the touchscreen  
Clean the touch screen when needed (fingerprints, dust build-up).  
Wipe the touch screen gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.  
CAUTION: Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touch screen. Do not pour or spray  
water directly onto the touch screen.  
Clean the glass  
Clean the glass only if dirt is visible, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality, such as  
streaking.  
Clean the glass surface by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth.  
CAUTION: Do not pour or spray liquids directly onto the glass.Do not press hard on the glass surface.  
(You could break the glass).  
Clean the ADF delivery system  
Clean the ADF only if it is visibly marked or dirty, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality  
(such as streaking).  
1. Lift the top cover.  
Figure 11-8 Clean the ADF delivery system (1 of 5)  
172 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2. Locate the top and bottom ADF glass strips.  
Figure 11-9 Clean the ADF delivery system (2 of 5)  
3. Clean the glass strips by wiping them gently with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth.  
4. Locate the white, vinyl backing.  
Figure 11-10 Clean the ADF delivery system (3 of 5)  
5. Locate the white, vinyl calibration strips.  
Figure 11-11 Clean the ADF delivery system (4 of 5)  
6. Clean the ADF backing and the calibration strips by wiping them with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth.  
7. Close the top cover.  
Figure 11-12 Clean the ADF delivery system (5 of 5)  
Clean the top ADF glass strip  
If you are still experiencing poor copy quality, you might need to clean the top ADF glass strip.  
ENWW  
Clean the MFP 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION: Clean this area only if you see copy defects such as streaks, and you notice dust inside  
the glass strip. Cleaning this area frequently could introduce dust into the MFP.  
1. Open the ADF cover.  
Figure 11-13 Clean the top ADF glass strip (1 of 4)  
2. Locate the latch that releases the top ADF glass strip. Push the latch to the left, and pull down to  
expose the inside of the glass strip.  
Figure 11-14 Clean the top ADF glass strip (2 of 4)  
3. Gently wipe the glass with a dry, lint-free cloth.  
CAUTION: Use dry cloth only in this area. Do not use solvents, cleaners, water, or compressed  
air. Doing so could severely damage the MFP.  
4. Pull the latch to the left and return the glass strip to its normal position.  
Figure 11-15 Clean the top ADF glass strip (3 of 4)  
5. Close the ADF cover.  
Figure 11-16 Clean the top ADF glass strip (4 of 4)  
174 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clean the ADF rollers  
You should clean the rollers in the ADF if you are experiencing misfeeds or if your originals show marks  
as they exit the ADF.  
1. Open the top cover.  
CAUTION: Clean the rollers only if you experience misfeeds or marks on the originals, and you  
notice dust on the rollers. Cleaning the rollers frequently could introduce dust into the MFP.  
Figure 11-17 Clean the ADF rollers (1 of 6)  
2. Locate the rollers near the glass strips.  
Figure 11-18 Clean the ADF rollers (2 of 6)  
3. Wipe the rollers gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.  
CAUTION: Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the MFP.  
4. Close the top cover.  
Figure 11-19 Clean the ADF rollers (3 of 6)  
ENWW  
Clean the MFP 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Open the ADF cover.  
Figure 11-20 Clean the ADF rollers (4 of 6)  
6. Locate the rollers.  
Figure 11-21 Clean the ADF rollers (5 of 6)  
7. Wipe the rollers with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.  
CAUTION: Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the MFP.  
8. Close the ADF cover.  
Figure 11-22 Clean the ADF rollers (6 of 6)  
9. Close the delivery guide and wipe its outside surface with the cloth.  
176 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calibrate the scanner  
Calibrate the scanner to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage head) for ADF  
and flatbed scans. Because of mechanical tolerances, the scanner's carriage head might not read the  
position of the image accurately. During the calibration procedure, scanner offset values are calculated  
and stored. The offset values are then used when producing scans so that the correct portion of the  
document is captured.  
Scanner calibration should be carried out only if you notice offset problems with the scanned images.  
The scanner is calibrated before it leaves the factory. It needs to be calibrated again only rarely.  
1. From the Home screen, scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Troubleshooting.  
3. Touch Calibrate Scanner.  
4. Touch Calibrate and then follow the on-screen instructions.  
ENWW  
Calibrate the scanner 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configure alerts  
You can use HP Web Jetadmin or the MFP’s embedded Web server to configure the system to alert  
you of problems with the MFP. The alerts take the form of e-mail messages to the e-mail account or  
accounts that you specify.  
You can configure the following:  
The printer(s) you want to monitor  
What alerts are to be received (for example, alerts for paper jams, paper out, supplies status, and  
cover open)  
The e-mail account to which the alerts should be forwarded  
Software  
HP Web Jetadmin  
Information location  
See the HP Web Jetadmin Help system for details on alerts  
and how to set them up.  
Embedded Web server  
See Embedded Web server on page 56 for general information  
about the embedded Web server.  
See the embedded Web server Help system for details on  
alerts and how to set them up.  
178 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Manage supplies  
Use genuine HP print cartridges for the best printing results.  
HP print cartridges  
When you use a genuine new HP print cartridge, you can obtain the following supplies information:  
Percentage of supplies remaining  
Estimated number of pages remaining  
Number of pages printed  
NOTE: See Supplies and accessories on page 239 for cartridge ordering information.  
Non-HP print cartridges  
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or  
remanufactured. Service or repair required as a result of using a non-HP print cartridge will not be  
covered under the MFP warranty.  
If the non-HP print cartridge was sold to you as a genuine HP product, see HP fraud hotline  
Print cartridge authentication  
The HP LaserJet M9040 MFP and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP automatically authenticate the print  
cartridges when the cartridges are inserted into the MFP. During authentication, the MFP will let you  
know if a cartridge is a genuine HP print cartridge.  
If the MFP control panel message states that this is not a genuine HP print cartridge and you believe  
you purchased an HP print cartridge, call the HP fraud hotline.  
To override a non-HP print cartridge error message, touch OK.  
HP fraud hotline  
Contact the HP fraud hotline if you install an HP print cartridge and a message on the control panel  
states that the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the product is genuine and take steps to  
resolve the problem.  
The following issues are signs that your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge:  
A high number of problems occur with the print cartridge.  
The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging differs from HP  
packaging).  
Print cartridge storage  
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.  
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few  
minutes.  
ENWW  
Manage supplies 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Table 11-1 Print cartridge temperature specifications  
Environmental condition Recommended  
Allowed  
Storage/standby  
Temperature (print cartridge) 17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F)  
15° to 30°C (59° to 86°F)  
-20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)  
Print cartridge life expectancy  
Average cartridge yield is 30,000 pages in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. Actual yield depends on  
specific use.  
Check the print cartridge life  
You can check the print cartridge life on the MFP control panel, in the embedded Web server, MFP  
software, HP Easy Printer Care, or through the HP Web Jetadmin software.  
On the MFP control panel  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
3. Touch Configuration Page.  
4. Touch Supplies Status Page.  
5. Touch Print.  
NOTE: If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page might not show the remaining life  
for those supplies.  
In the embedded Web server  
1. In your browser, type the IP address or host name for the printer home page. This takes you to the  
printer status page.  
2. On the left side of the screen, click Supplies Status. This takes you to the supplies status page,  
which provides print cartridge information.  
Through HP Easy Printer Care  
In the Overview tab in the Supplies Status section, click Supplies Details to open the supplies status  
page.  
Through HP Web Jetadmin  
In HP Web Jetadmin, select the printer device. The device status page shows print cartridge information.  
180 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Printer maintenance kit  
NOTE: The printer maintenance kit is a consumable and is not covered under warranty.  
To ensure optimum print quality, HP recommends that a new printer maintenance kit be installed  
approximately every 350,000 pages. Depending on how you use the MFP, you might need to replace  
the kit more often. If you have questions about how frequently you should replace the printer  
maintenance kit, contact the support center at www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/  
When the Replace maintenance kit message appears on the control panel, you need to purchase a  
printer maintenance kit and install the new parts. The part number for the 110V kit is C9152A. The part  
number for the 220V kit is C9153A. The printer maintenance kit contains two Type 1 rollers, seven Type  
2 rollers, one transfer roller assembly, and one fuser assembly. Complete instructions for installing the  
kit components are included in the printer maintenance kit box.  
ENWW  
Printer maintenance kit 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Manage memory  
The MFP has two double data rate (DDR) DIMM slots to provide more MFP memory. DDR DIMMs are  
available in 64, 128, and 256 MB, for a maximum of 512 MB.  
The MFP has two compact flash slots to provide the following features:  
To add flash-based memory accessory fonts, macros, and patterns, use the appropriate DDR  
DIMM.  
To add other flash-based printer languages and MFP options, use the appropriate DDR DIMM.  
NOTE: Single in line memory modules (SIMMs) used on previous HP LaserJet products are not  
compatible with this MFP.  
Determine memory requirements  
The amount of memory you need depends on the types of documents you print. Your MFP can print  
most text and graphics at 1200 dpi FastRes without additional memory.  
You might want to add more memory to the MFP if you often print complex graphics or PS documents,  
print two-sided documents (duplex printing), use many downloaded fonts, or print large paper sizes  
(such as A3, B4, or 11 x 17).  
Install memory  
Use this procedure to install additional DDR memory DIMMs. Before you begin, print a configuration  
page to find out how much memory is installed in the MFP. The following table lists the maximum amount  
of memory allowed for each DIMM slot.  
Slot label on the Configuration page  
Slot label on the Formatter board  
Description  
Slot 1  
Slot 2  
Total  
J1  
J2  
256 MB  
128 MB  
384 MB  
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage DDR DIMMs. When handling DDR DIMMs, either wear an  
antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package, and then touch bare  
metal on the MFP.  
1. If you have not already done so, print a configuration page to find out how much memory is installed  
in the MFP.  
2. Slide the optional output device away from the print engine.  
Figure 11-23 Install DDR memory DIMMs (1 of 8)  
182 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3. Turn the MFP off. Disconnect the power cord and any cables.  
Figure 11-24 Install DDR memory DIMMs (2 of 8)  
4. Loosen the two captive thumb screws on the back of the MFP.  
Figure 11-25 Install DDR memory DIMMs (3 of 8)  
5. Grasp the screws and pull the formatter board out of the MFP. Place it on a flat, non-conductive  
surface.  
Figure 11-26 Install DDR memory DIMMs (4 of 8)  
6. Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package. Hold the DIMM with fingers against the side edges  
and thumbs against the back edge. Align the notches on the DIMM with the DIMM slot. (Check that  
the locks on each side of the DIMM slot are open, or outward.)  
Figure 11-27 Install DDR memory DIMMs (5 of 8)  
ENWW  
Manage memory 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Press the DIMM straight into the slot (press firmly). Make sure the locks on each side of the DIMM  
snap inward into place. (To remove a DIMM, the locks must be released.)  
Figure 11-28 Install DDR memory DIMMs (6 of 8)  
8. Slide the formatter board back into the MFP and tighten the two screws.  
Figure 11-29 Install DDR memory DIMMs (7 of 8)  
9. Plug in the power cord and connect all cables. Turn the MFP on.  
Figure 11-30 Install DDR memory DIMMs (8 of 8)  
10. Reconnect the optional output device to the MFP.  
184 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Verify memory installation  
Follow this procedure to verify that DDR DIMMs are installed correctly:  
1. Check that the MFP control panel displays Ready when the MFP is turned on. If an error message  
appears, a DIMM might have been incorrectly installed.  
2. Print the configuration page.  
3. Check the memory section on the configuration page and compare it to the configuration before  
the DIMM installation. If the amount of memory has not increased, one of the following situations  
might have occurred:  
The DIMM might not be installed correctly. Repeat the installation procedure.  
The DIMM might be defective. Try a new DIMM, or try installing the DIMM in a different slot.  
NOTE: If you installed a printer language (personality), check the Installed Personalities and Options  
section on the configuration page. This area should list the new printer language.  
ENWW  
Manage memory 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Economy settings  
Sleep and wake  
Set the sleep delay  
Use the sleep-delay feature to set the period of time that the MFP must be idle before it enters the sleep  
mode. The default setting is 45 minutes.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Time/Scheduling.  
3. Touch Sleep Delay.  
4. Touch the sleep-delay setting that you want.  
Set the sleep time  
Use the sleep time feature to put the MFP in sleep mode at a set time each day.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Time/Scheduling.  
3. Touch Sleep Time.  
4. Touch the day of the week for the sleep time.  
5. Touch Custom.  
6. Touch Save.  
7. Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.  
8. If you want to put the MFP in sleep mode at the same time every day (including weekends), on the  
Apply to All Days screen, touch Yes. If you want to set the time for individual days, touch No, and  
repeat the procedure for each day.  
Set the wake time  
Use the wake time feature to wake the MFP at a set time each day.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Time/Scheduling.  
3. Touch Wake Time.  
4. Touch the day of the week for the wake time.  
5. Touch Custom.  
6. Touch Save.  
186 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
7. Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.  
8. If you want to wake the MFP at the same time every day (including weekends), on the Apply to  
All Days screen, touch Yes. If you want to set the time for individual days, touch No, and repeat  
the procedure for each day.  
ENWW  
Economy settings 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188 Chapter 11 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Solve problems  
If the MFP is not responding correctly, complete the steps in the following checklist, in order. If the MFP  
does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If a step resolves the  
problem, you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist.  
Troubleshooting checklist  
1. Make sure that the MFP Ready light is on. If no lights are on, complete these steps:  
a. Check the power-cable connections.  
b. Check that the power switch is on.  
c. Check the power source by plugging the MFP directly into the wall or into a different outlet.  
d. If none of these measures restores power, contact HP Customer Care.  
2. Check the cabling.  
a. Check the cable connection between the MFP and the computer or network port. Make sure  
that the connection is secure.  
b. Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible.  
c. Check the network connection. See Solve network connectivity problems on page 234.  
3. Ensure that the print media that you are using meets specifications.  
4. Print a configuration page (see Information pages on page 150). If the MFP is connected to a  
network, an HP Jetdirect page also prints.  
a. If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains print media.  
b. If the page jams in the MFP, see Clear jams on page 194.  
5. If the configuration page prints, check the following items.  
a. If the page prints correctly, then the MFP hardware is working. The problem is with the  
computer you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program.  
b. If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the MFP hardware. Contact  
HP Customer Care.  
6. Verify that you have installed the HP LaserJet M9040/M9050 MFP printer driver.  
7. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works,  
then the problem is with the program you are using. If this solution does not work, try printing the  
job from another computer that has the MFP software installed.  
8. If the problem is still not resolved, see Determining Solve MFP problems on page 191.  
190 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Determining Solve MFP problems  
Situation/Message  
Solution  
The control-panel display is blank, and internal fans are not  
running.  
Make sure that the MFP power is on. Press all the keys to see  
if one is stuck. Contact your HP-authorized service  
representative if these steps do not work.  
The MFP is turned on, but the internal fans are not running.  
Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the MFP power  
configuration. (See the label on the back of the device for  
voltage requirements.) If you are using a power strip and its  
voltage is not within specification, plug the MFP directly into  
the power receptacle.  
The MFP voltage is not correct.  
Make sure that the line voltage is in the correct range. (See the  
label on the back of the device for voltage requirements.)  
Messages appear on the control-panel display.  
Print media is jammed in the MFP.  
Check for jams. For more information, see Clear jams  
The control-panel display shows the wrong language or  
unfamiliar characters.  
Reconfigure the control-panel display language.  
Turn the MFP off and then on.  
Administration > Device Behavior > Language  
An error occurs during a Digital Send job. Job failed.  
The MFP experienced an error during the digital sending job.  
The administrator should check on the status of the SMTP  
The e-mail gateway could not accept the job because the  
attachment is too large.  
Reduce the size of the e-mail attachment by setting the  
maximum attachment size. Set the maximum attachment size  
on the Digital Sending tab of the embedded Web server. See  
Try using a different file format or sending the document a few  
pages at a time.  
A network connection is required for digital sending  
The MFP cannot find a network connection. The administrator  
should check to see if the MFP is connected to the network.  
ENWW  
Determining Solve MFP problems 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control-panel message types  
Four types of control-panel messages can indicate the status of or problems with the device.  
Message type  
Description  
Status messages  
Status messages reflect the current state of the device. They inform you of normal device operation  
and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the device changes. Whenever  
the device is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message Ready  
appears if the device is online.  
Warning messages  
Error messages  
Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the  
Ready or status messages and remain until you touch OK. Some warning messages are clearable.  
If Clearable Warnings is set to Job on the device Device Behavior menu, the next print job clears  
these messages.  
Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing  
a jam.  
Some error messages are auto-continuable. If Auto Continue is set on the menus, the device will  
continue normal operation after an auto-continuable error message appears for 10 seconds.  
NOTE: Pressing any button during the 10-second auto-continuable error message overrides the  
auto-continue feature, and the button function takes precedence. For example, pressing the Stop  
button pauses printing and offers the option to cancel the print job.  
Critical-error messages Critical error messages inform you of a device failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by  
turning the device off and then on. These messages are not affected by the Auto Continue setting.  
If a critical error persists, service is required.  
192 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control-panel messages  
The product provides robust control panel messaging. When a message appears on the control panel,  
follow the on-screen instructions to resolve the issue. If the product displays an “Error” or “Attention”  
message, and no steps are shown to resolve the issue, turn the product off then on. Contact HP support  
if you continue to experience issues with the product.  
To get additional information for warnings that appear in the status line, touch the Warning button  
.
For additional information on a variety of topics, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the  
home screen.  
ENWW  
Control-panel messages 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clear jams  
If a jam message appears on the control panel, look for media in the locations indicated in the following  
illustration. You might need to look for jammed media in locations other than those that are indicated in  
the jam message. If the location of the jam is not obvious, look first in the front door area.  
After looking at the illustration, you can go to the procedure for clearing the jam. When clearing jams,  
be very careful not to tear the media. If a small piece of media remains in the MFP, it could cause  
additional jams. If jams are a recurring problem, see Solve repeated jams on page 212.  
NOTE: Loose toner might remain in the MFP after a jam and cause output quality problems. These  
should clear up within a few pages.  
WARNING! Surfaces in and around the MFP can be hot to the touch. Turn off the MFP and allow it to  
cool before attempting to clear jams.  
Jam locations  
Figure 12-1 HP LaserJet M9040 MFP or HP LaserJet M9050 MFP with the 3000-sheet stapler/stacker  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
ADF  
Tray 1  
Right door  
Vertical transfer door  
Tray 4  
Trays 2 and 3  
Left door (behind the output device)  
Duplexer (inside the MFP)  
Output device  
Lower bin  
194 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11  
12  
Front door and print-cartridge area  
Upper bin  
Clear jams from the duplexer  
1. Move the output device away from the MFP to gain access to the left door.  
Figure 12-2 Clear jams in the duplex printing accessory (1 of 6)  
2. Open the left door and carefully pull out any paper from area.  
WARNING! Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It can be hot.  
Figure 12-3 Clear jams in the duplex printing accessory (2 of 6)  
3. Remove the duplex printing accessory by pressing the green lever and pulling the unit out until it  
stops.  
Figure 12-4 Clear jams in the duplex printing accessory (3 of 6)  
4. Remove any paper by lifting the two green levers in the duplex printing accessory.  
ENWW  
Clear jams 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Open the front door.  
Figure 12-5 Clear jams in the duplex printing accessory (4 of 6)  
6. Check for paper in the duplex printing accessory area, and remove any paper by pulling it out of  
the MFP. Be careful not to tear the paper.  
Figure 12-6 Clear jams in the duplex printing accessory (5 of 6)  
7. Reinstall the duplex printing accessory by sliding it back into the slot until it locks into place.  
Figure 12-7 Clear jams in the duplex printing accessory (6 of 6)  
8. Close all open doors. Push the output device back into place.  
Clear jams from the input-tray areas  
Clear jams in tray 1  
1. Check for media in the tray 1 area, and remove any media from this area. Carefully check to be  
sure you have removed all pieces of torn media.  
Figure 12-8 Clear jams in tray 1 (1 of 2)  
196 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Open and close the right door to reset the MFP.  
Figure 12-9 Clear jams in tray 1 (2 of 2)  
Clear jams inside the right door  
1. Open the right door.  
Figure 12-10 Clear jams inside the right door (1 of 3)  
2. Check for media in the right door area, and remove any media from this area. Carefully check to  
be sure you have removed all pieces of torn media.  
3. Open the jam access cover. Pull out and lift the green tab.  
Figure 12-11 Clear jams inside the right door (2 of 3)  
4. Remove any media from this area by pulling it out of the MFP.  
5. Push the green lever down to the original position.  
Figure 12-12 Clear jams inside the right door (3 of 3)  
6. Close the right door.  
ENWW  
Clear jams 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clear jams in trays 2 and 3  
1. Open the tray until it stops.  
Figure 12-13 Clear jams in trays 2 and 3 (1 of 3)  
2. Check for media in the tray area, and remove any media from this area. Carefully check to be sure  
you have removed all pieces of torn media.  
3. Close the tray.  
Figure 12-14 Clear jams in trays 2 and 3 (2 of 3)  
4. Open the right door, remove any visible media, and close the right door. This resets the MFP.  
Figure 12-15 Clear jams in trays 2 and 3 (3 of 3)  
Clear jams in tray 4  
1. Open the vertical transfer door on tray 4.  
Figure 12-16 Clear jams in tray 4 (1 of 4)  
2. Check for paper in this area, and remove any paper from this area. Carefully check to be sure that  
you have removed all pieces of torn paper.  
198 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. If you did not see any paper in the vertical transfer door, open tray 4.  
Figure 12-17 Clear jams in tray 4 (2 of 4)  
4. Check for paper in the tray area, and remove any paper from this area. Carefully check to be sure  
you have removed all pieces of torn paper.  
5. Close tray 4.  
Figure 12-18 Clear jams in tray 4 (3 of 4)  
6. Close the vertical transfer door.  
Figure 12-19 Clear jams in tray 4 (4 of 4)  
Clear jams from the output areas  
Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker  
1. If the jam extends into the output bins, slowly and carefully pull the media straight out of the MFP  
so that it does not tear.  
Figure 12-20 Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (1 of 7)  
ENWW  
Clear jams 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Move the output device away from the MFP.  
Figure 12-21 Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (2 of 7)  
3. On the stacker, lift the wire on the lower bin of the device, and carefully pull out any media from  
this area. On the stapler/stacker, carefully pull out any media that might be protruding from the  
accumulator area.  
NOTE: Only the stacker has the wire on the lower bin.  
Figure 12-22 Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (3 of 7)  
4. Locate the green handle in the flipper area and lift the handle.  
Figure 12-23 Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (4 of 7)  
5. Carefully pull out any media from the flipper area.  
Figure 12-24 Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (5 of 7)  
WARNING! Avoid touching the flipper area. It can be hot.  
200 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Locate the green handle in the paper path module, and then pull down on the handle.  
Figure 12-25 Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (6 of 7)  
7. Carefully pull out any media from the paper path module.  
8. Close all open doors. Push the output device back into place.  
Figure 12-26 Clear jams in the stacker or stapler/stacker (7 of 7)  
Clear jams in the paper-path area of the multifunction finisher  
1. Open the top cover.  
Figure 12-27 Clear jams in the paper-path area of the multifunction finisher (1 of 3)  
2. Slowly and carefully pull the paper straight out of the finisher so that it does not tear.  
Figure 12-28 Clear jams in the paper-path area of the multifunction finisher (2 of 3)  
ENWW  
Clear jams 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Close the finisher cover.  
Figure 12-29 Clear jams in the paper-path area of the multifunction finisher (3 of 3)  
Clear jams in between the multifunction finisher and the MFP  
1. Move the finisher away from the MFP.  
Figure 12-30 Clear jams in between the multifunction finisher and the MFP (1 of 4)  
2. Carefully remove any paper from the MFP output area.  
Figure 12-31 Clear jams in between the multifunction finisher and the MFP (2 of 4)  
3. Carefully remove any paper from the finisher input area.  
Figure 12-32 Clear jams in between the multifunction finisher and the MFP (3 of 4)  
202 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Push the multifunction finisher back into place.  
Figure 12-33 Clear jams in between the multifunction finisher and the MFP (4 of 4)  
Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher  
1. Move the finisher away from the MFP.  
Figure 12-34 Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (1 of 7)  
2. If paper is jammed in the finisher input area but has not entered the folding rollers, carefully remove  
the paper from the input area and then skip to step 7.  
Figure 12-35 Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (2 of 7)  
3. Open the back door on the finisher. If jammed paper inside the finisher has not entered the folding  
rollers, remove the paper and then skip to step 7. If the paper has entered the folding rollers,  
proceed to step 4.  
Figure 12-36 Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (3 of 7)  
ENWW  
Clear jams 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Open the stapler-unit door.  
Figure 12-37 Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (4 of 7)  
5. Turn the bottom green knob clockwise to advance the jammed paper through the folding rollers  
and into the booklet bin.  
Figure 12-38 Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (5 of 7)  
6. Close the stapler-unit door.  
Figure 12-39 Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (6 of 7)  
7. Push the multifunction finisher back into place.  
Figure 12-40 Clear booklet jams in the multifunction finisher (7 of 7)  
204 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher  
1. Open the stapler-unit door.  
Figure 12-41 Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (1 of 11)  
2. Slide the stapler unit toward you.  
Figure 12-42 Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (2 of 11)  
3. Turn the large green knob until you see the blue dot (this indicates that the stapler is fully open).  
Figure 12-43 Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (3 of 11)  
4. Turn the small green knob at the top of the stapler unit clockwise until the staple cartridge moves  
to the left of the stapler unit.  
Figure 12-44 Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (4 of 11)  
CAUTION: The blue dot must appear in the window of the stapler unit before you remove the  
staple cartridge. If you try to remove the staple cartridge before the blue dot appears in the window,  
you could damage the device.  
ENWW  
Clear jams 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Remove the staple cartridge.  
Figure 12-45 Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (5 of 11)  
6. Pull up on the lever labeled with a green dot.  
Figure 12-46 Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (6 of 11)  
7. Remove the damaged staple.  
Figure 12-47 Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (7 of 11)  
8. Press down on the lever labeled with a green dot.  
Figure 12-48 Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (8 of 11)  
206 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Reinstall the staple cartridge.  
Figure 12-49 Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (9 of 11)  
10. Slide the stapler unit into the device.  
Figure 12-50 Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (10 of 11)  
11. Close the stapler-unit door.  
Figure 12-51 Clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (11 of 11)  
Clear a jam in the upper half of the stapler head in the multifunction finisher  
1. Follow steps 1 through 4 of the procedure to clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher.  
2. Locate the damaged staple at the back of the stapler head, and remove the staple.  
Figure 12-52 Clear a jam in the upper half of the stapler head in the multifunction finisher  
3. Follow steps 10 through 11 from the procedure to clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher.  
ENWW  
Clear jams 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker  
1. Move the stapler/stacker away from the MFP.  
Figure 12-53 Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (1 of 9)  
2. Open the stapler unit door.  
Figure 12-54 Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (2 of 9)  
3. Pull the cartridge out.  
Figure 12-55 Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (3 of 9)  
4. Pull up on the lever labeled with a green dot.  
Figure 12-56 Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (4 of 9)  
208 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Remove the damaged staple.  
Figure 12-57 Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (5 of 9)  
6. Press down on the lever labeled with a green dot.  
Figure 12-58 Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (6 of 9)  
7. Reinstall the staple cartridge.  
Figure 12-59 Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (7 of 9)  
8. Close the stapler unit door.  
Figure 12-60 Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (8 of 9)  
ENWW  
Clear jams 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Push the stapler/stacker back into place.  
Figure 12-61 Clear a staple jam from the stapler/stacker (9 of 9)  
NOTE: The stapler needs to reload after clearing a staple jam, so the first few documents (no more  
than five) might not be stapled. If a print job is sent and the stapler is jammed or is out of staples, the  
job will still print as long as the path to the output bin is not blocked.  
Clear jams in the left door (fuser area)  
1. Move the output device away from the MFP to gain access to the left door.  
Figure 12-62 Clear jams in the left door (1 of 4)  
2. Open the left door.  
WARNING! Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It can be hot.  
Figure 12-63 Clear jams in the left door (2 of 4)  
3. Remove any jammed or damaged media from this area by pulling it out of the MFP.  
210 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Press down on the green tab and carefully check for media. Be sure to remove all pieces of torn  
media.  
Figure 12-64 Clear jams in the left door (3 of 4)  
5. Close the left door. Push the output device back into place.  
Figure 12-65 Clear jams in the left door (4 of 4)  
Clear jams in the 8-bin mailbox  
1. Move the 8-bin mailbox away from the MFP. To do this, stand on the left side of the MFP and pull  
the 8-bin mailbox straight toward you.  
Figure 12-66 Clear jams in the 8-bin mailbox (1 of 3)  
2. Carefully remove the upper (face-up) bin.  
3. Pull down the handle on the output paper module and remove any jammed paper from this area.  
Figure 12-67 Clear jams in the 8-bin mailbox (2 of 3)  
ENWW  
Clear jams 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Push the 8-bin mailbox back into place, and then reattach the upper bin.  
Figure 12-68 Clear jams in the 8-bin mailbox (3 of 3)  
NOTE: Check that the paper used is not thicker than the 8-bin mailbox supports. See Supported paper  
Solve repeated jams  
Situation  
General repeated jam problems  
Solution  
1. Verify that the media is correctly loaded in the trays and that  
all width guides are correctly set (see Print tasks on page 97).  
2. Verify that the paper tray is set for the size of media installed  
and that the tray is not overloaded.  
3. Try turning over the stack of media in the tray. If you are  
using prepunched or letterhead paper, try printing from tray 1.  
4. Do not use previously printed media or torn, worn, or  
irregular media. For recommended media for your MFP, see  
5. Check the media specifications. (See Supported paper and  
print media sizes on page 81.) If media is outside of the  
recommended specifications, problems can occur.  
6. MFP might be dirty. Clean the MFP as described in Clean  
7. Check that all damaged or jammed media is removed from  
MFP.  
Repeated jams in the ADF  
1. The ADF might be dirty. Clean the ADF as described in  
NOTE: If jams continue, contact your HP-authorized service provider. (See the HP support flyer or go  
212 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Media-handling problems  
Use only media that meets the specifications outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media  
Guide. This guide is available at www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide.  
Printer feeds multiple sheets  
Printer feeds multiple sheets  
Cause  
Solution  
The input tray is overfilled.  
Remove excess media from the input tray.  
Print media is sticking together.  
Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180° or flip it over, and then  
reload it into the tray.  
NOTE: Do not fan media. Fanning can cause static  
electricity, which can cause media to stick together.  
Media does not meet the specifications for this MFP.  
Trays are not properly adjusted.  
Use only media that meets HP media specifications for this  
MFP.  
Make sure that the rear media-length guide indicates the  
length of media being used.  
Printer feeds incorrect page size  
Printer feeds incorrect page size  
Cause  
Solution  
The correct size media is not loaded in the input tray.  
Load the correct size media in the input tray.  
The correct size media is not selected in the software program Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer  
or printer driver.  
driver are correct, because the software-program settings  
override the printer-driver and control-panel settings, and the  
printer-driver settings override the control-panel settings. For  
The correct size media for tray 1 is not selected in the MFP  
control panel.  
From the control panel, select the correct size media for tray  
1.  
The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray.  
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine  
the media size for which the tray is configured.  
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.  
Verify that the rear and width media guides are touching the  
paper.  
Printer pulls from incorrect tray  
Printer pulls from incorrect tray  
Cause  
Solution  
You are using a driver for a different printer. For more  
information.  
Use a driver for this printer.  
The specified tray is empty.  
Load media in the specified tray.  
ENWW  
Media-handling problems 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printer pulls from incorrect tray  
Cause  
Solution  
The Use Requested Tray option is set to First in the Tray  
Behavior sub-menu of the Device Behavior menu.  
Change the setting to Exclusively.  
The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray.  
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine  
the media size for which the tray is configured.  
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.  
Verify that the guides are touching the paper.  
Media does not feed automatically  
Media does not feed automatically  
Cause  
Solution  
Manual feed is selected in the software program.  
The correct size media is not loaded.  
The input tray is empty.  
Load tray 1 with media, or, if the media is loaded, touch OK.  
Load the correct size media.  
Load media into the input tray.  
Media from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the MFP and remove any media in the paper path.  
Closely inspect the fuser area for jams.  
The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray.  
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine  
the media size for which the tray is configured.  
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.  
Verify that the rear and width media guides are touching the  
paper.  
Media does not feed from tray 2, 3, or 4  
Media does not feed from tray 2, 3, or 4  
Cause  
Solution  
The correct size media is not loaded.  
Load the correct size media and verify that the custom-media  
switch is in the correct position.  
The input tray is empty.  
Load media in the input tray.  
The correct media type for the input tray is not selected in the From the MFP control panel, select the correct media type for  
MFP control panel. the input tray.  
Media from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the MFP and remove any media in the paper path.  
Closely inspect the fuser area for jams.  
None of the optional trays appear as input tray options.  
An optional tray is incorrectly installed.  
The optional trays only display as available if they are installed.  
Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify that  
the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional  
trays.  
Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is  
installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the  
MFP.  
214 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Media does not feed from tray 2, 3, or 4  
Cause  
Solution  
The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray.  
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine  
the media size for which the tray is configured.  
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.  
Verify that the guides are touching the paper.  
Transparencies will not feed  
Transparencies will not feed  
Cause  
Solution  
The correct media type is not specified in the software or printer Verify that the correct media type is selected in the software or  
driver.  
printer driver.  
Tray 1 is overfilled.  
Remove excess transparencies from tray 1. Do not exceed the  
maximum stack height for tray 1.  
Media in another input tray is the same size as the  
transparencies, and the MFP is defaulting to the other tray.  
Make sure that tray 1 is selected in the software program or  
printer driver. Use the MFP control panel to configure the tray  
to the media type loaded.  
Tray 1 is not configured correctly for type.  
Make sure that tray 1 is selected in the software program or  
printer driver. Use the MFP control panel to configure the tray  
to the media type loaded.  
Transparencies might not meet supported media  
specifications.  
Use only media that meets the HP media specifications for this  
MFP.  
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the MFP  
NOTE: Return the fuser levers to the down position after printing on envelopes. Failure to return levers  
to the down position for standard paper types can result in poor print quality.  
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the MFP  
Cause  
Solution  
Envelopes are loaded in an unsupported tray. Only tray 1 can Load envelopes into tray 1.  
feed envelopes.  
Envelopes are curled or damaged.  
Verify that the fuser levers are in the correct position. Try using  
different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled  
environment.  
Envelopes are sealing because the moisture content is too  
high.  
Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled  
environment.  
Envelope orientation is incorrect.  
Verify that the envelope is loaded correctly.  
Refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.  
Configure tray 1 size for envelopes.  
This MFP does not support the envelopes being used.  
Tray 1 is configured for a size other than envelopes.  
ENWW  
Media-handling problems 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Output is curled or wrinkled  
Output is curled or wrinkled  
Cause  
Solution  
Media does not meet the specifications for this MFP.  
Use only media that meets the HP media specifications for this  
MFP.  
Media is damaged or in poor condition.  
Remove media from the input tray and load media that is in  
good condition.  
Printer is operating in an excessively humid environment.  
You are printing large, solid-filled areas.  
Verify that the printing environment is within humidity  
specifications.  
Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a  
different pattern.  
Media used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed Remove media and replace it with media from a fresh,  
moisture.  
unopened package.  
Media has poorly cut edges.  
Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and  
then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan media. If the  
problem persists, replace the media.  
The specific media type was not configured for the tray or  
selected in the software.  
Configure the software for the media (see the software  
documentation). To configure the tray for the media, see  
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly  
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly  
Cause  
Solution  
You are trying to duplex on unsupported media.  
The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing.  
Verify that the media is supported for duplex printing.  
Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.  
The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or  
letterhead.  
Load preprinted forms and letterhead in tray 1 with the  
letterhead or printed side up and the bottom of the page  
feeding into the MFP. For tray 2, 3, and 4, load these media  
printed side down with the top of the page toward the back of  
the MFP.  
216 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Solve print-quality problems  
This section helps you define print-quality problems and what to do to correct them. Often print- quality  
problems can be handled easily by making sure that the device is correctly maintained, using print media  
that meets HP specifications, or running a cleaning page.  
Print-quality problems associated with media  
Some print-quality problems arise from the use of inappropriate media.  
Use media that meets HP specifications. See Supported paper and print media sizes  
on page 81, or see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide, which is available at  
The surface of the media is too smooth. Use media that meets HP specifications. See Supported  
The moisture content is uneven, too high, or too low. Use media from a different source or from an  
unopened ream.  
Some areas of the media reject toner. Use media from a different source or from an unopened  
ream.  
The letterhead you are using is printed on rough media. Use a smoother, xerographic media. If this  
solves your problem, ask the supplier of your letterhead to use media that meets the specifications  
The media is excessively rough. Use a smoother, xerographic media.  
The driver setting is incorrect. To change the media type setting, see Change printer-driver settings  
The media that you are using is too heavy for the media type setting that you selected, and the  
toner is not fusing to the media. See Default Options for Originals on page 17.  
Print-quality problems associated with the environment  
If the device is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions, verify that the printing environment is  
within specifications. See Operating environment on page 252.  
Print-quality problems associated with jams  
Make sure that all sheets are cleared from the paper path. See Clear jams on page 194.  
If the device recently jammed, print two to three pages to clean the device.  
If the sheets do not pass through the fuser and cause image defects on subsequent documents,  
print three pages to clean the device. If the problem persists, print and process a cleaning page.  
ENWW  
Solve print-quality problems 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Light print (partial page)  
Figure 12-69 Light print (partial page)  
1. Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed.  
2. The print cartridge might be defective. Replace the print cartridge.  
3. The media might not meet HP specifications (for example, the media is too moist or too rough).  
Light print (entire page)  
Figure 12-70 Light print (entire page)  
1. Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed.  
2. Make sure that the Economode setting is turned off at the control panel and in the printer driver.  
3. Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. Open the Print Quality menu and  
increase the Toner Density setting. See Print Quality menu on page 42.  
4. Try using a different type of media.  
5. The print cartridge might be defective. Replace the print cartridge.  
218 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specks  
Figure 12-71 Specks  
Specks might appear on a page after a jam has been cleared.  
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
2. Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page. See Clean the MFP on page 170.  
3. Try using a different type of media.  
4. Check the print cartridge for leaks. If the print cartridge is leaking, replace it.  
Dropouts  
Figure 12-72 Dropouts  
1. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating  
2. If the media is rough, and the toner easily rubs off, open the Administration menu at the device  
control panel. Open the Print Quality menu, select Fuser Modes, and then select the media type  
you are using. See Print Quality menu on page 42.  
3. Try using a smoother media.  
ENWW  
Solve print-quality problems 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Lines  
Figure 12-73 Lines  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A
a
B
c
c
c
c
c
A
A
a
a
B
c
c
c
c
c
b
b
B
b
A
B
b
a
A
a
B
A
a
B
b
b
b
b
A
a
B
A
a
A
a
B C  
B C  
b
A
a
B C  
b
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
2. Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page. See Clean the MFP on page 170.  
3. Replace the print cartridge.  
Gray background  
Figure 12-74 Gray background  
1. Do not use media that has already been run through the device.  
2. Try using a different type of media.  
3. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
4. Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.  
5. Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print Quality menu, increase the  
Toner Density setting. See Print Quality menu on page 42.  
6. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating  
7. Replace the print cartridge.  
220 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Toner smear  
Figure 12-75 Toner smear  
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
2. Verify that the fuser levers are in the down position (unless printing on envelopes).  
3. Try using a different type of media.  
4. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating  
5. Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page. See Clean the MFP on page 170.  
6. Replace the print cartridge.  
Loose toner  
Figure 12-76 Loose toner  
Loose toner, in this context, is defined as toner that can be rubbed off the page.  
1. Verify that the fuser levers are in the down position (unless printing on envelopes).  
2. If media is heavy or rough, open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print  
Quality submenu, select Fuser Modes, and then select the media type you are using.  
3. If you have observed a rougher texture on one side of your media, try printing on the smoother  
side.  
4. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating  
5. Make sure that type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See Supported  
ENWW  
Solve print-quality problems 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repeating defects  
Figure 12-77 Repeating defects  
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
2. If the distance between defects is 44 mm (1.73 in.), 53 mm (2.1 in.), 63 mm (2.5 in.), or 94 mm (3.7  
in.), the print cartridge might need to be replaced.  
3. Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page. See Clean the MFP on page 170.  
Repeating image  
Figure 12-78 Repeating image  
Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk,  
Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk,  
The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf  
j
us  
a
weue jd, fnk  
The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf  
j
us  
a
weue jd, fnk  
ksneh vnk kjdfkaak  
d
ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn.  
ksneh vnk kjdfkaak  
d
ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn.  
Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflklndjd skshkshdcnksnjcnal  
aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj  
Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflklndjd skshkshdcnksnjcnal  
aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj  
hwlsdknls nwljsnlnscl nijhsn clsnci  
is n. jns firstie jakjd jjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted,  
and when hghj hgjhk jdj dt sonnleh.  
j
hn. Iosi fsjs jlkhandjna this  
hwlsdknls nwljsnlnscl nijhsn clsnci  
is n. jns firstie jakjd jjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted,  
and when hghj hgjhk jdj dt sonnleh.  
j
hn. Iosi fsjs jlkhandjna this  
a
h
a
d
a
a
h
a
d
a
a
a
Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk  
fhjdjht ajshef. Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk  
d
Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk  
fhjdjht ajshef. Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk  
d
.a  
t
.a  
t
sjskrplobook.  
as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmda  
shjkh sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjn  
ehreh ahkj vaknihidh was skjsaa dhkjfn an  
cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa  
sa fjkank cak ajhjkn eanjsd qa jhc  
l, and the skeina of ahthvnasm  
nja vkfkahjd Smakkljl sehiah adheuf  
vka ah call lthe jakha fijs.  
C
amegaj  
d
sand their djnln as orged tyehha  
sjskrplobook.  
as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmda  
shjkh sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjn  
ehreh ahkj vaknihidh was skjsaa dhkjfn an  
cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa  
sa fjkank cak ajhjkn eanjsd qa jhc  
l, and the skeina of ahthvnasm  
nja vkfkahjd Smakkljl sehiah adheuf  
vka ah call lthe jakha fijs.  
C
amegaj  
d
sand their djnln as orged tyehha  
l
vlala tojk. Ho sn shj  
l
vlala tojk. Ho sn shj  
a
v
j
hv vh  
a
efve  
r
a
v
j
hv vh  
a
efve  
r
T
a
T
a
h
p
j
a
kah  
jtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana  
Sayhvjan tjhhjhrajn ve fh  
if you do klakc  
w
asj kskjnkas  
h
p
j
a
kah  
jtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana  
Sayhvjan tjhhjhrajn ve fh  
if you do klakc  
w
asj kskjnkas  
n
e
n
e
a
a
.
k
a
a
.
k
v
w
.
a
h
k
v
w
.
a
h
k
c
a
a
d
a
s
d
c
a
a
d
a
s
d
Sincerel y,  
Mr. Scmehnjcj  
Sincerel y,  
Mr. Scmehnjcj  
This type of defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a large quantity of narrow media.  
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
2. Make sure that type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See Supported  
3. If the distance between defects is 44 mm (1.73 in.), 53 mm (2.1 in.), 63 mm (2.5 in.), or 94 mm (3.7  
in.), the print cartridge might need to be replaced.  
222 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Misformed characters  
Figure 12-79 Misformed characters  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating  
Page skew  
Figure 12-80 Page skew  
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
2. Verify that no torn pieces of media are inside the device.  
3. Make sure that media is loaded correctly and that all adjustments have been made. See Load  
paper and print media on page 85. Make sure that the guides in the tray are not too tight or too  
loose against the media.  
4. Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.  
5. Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See  
6. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. (See Operating  
7. Perform a tray alignment by opening the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the  
Print Quality submenu, touch Set Registration. Choose a tray under Source and then run a test  
page. For more information, see Print Quality menu on page 42.  
ENWW  
Solve print-quality problems 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Curl or wave  
Figure 12-81 Curl or wave  
1. Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.  
2. Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. (See  
3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. (See Operating  
4. Try printing to a different output bin.  
5. If media is lightweight and smooth, open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On  
the Print Quality submenu, touch Fuser Modes, and then select the media type you are using.  
Change the setting to Low, which helps reduce the heat in the fusing process.  
Wrinkles or creases  
Figure 12-82 Wrinkles or creases  
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating  
3. Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.  
4. Make sure that media is loaded correctly and all adjustments have been made. See Load paper  
5. Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See  
6. If envelopes are creasing, try storing envelopes so that they lie flat.  
If the above actions do not improve wrinkles or creases, open the Administration menu at the device  
control panel. On the Print Quality submenu, select Fuser Modes, and then select the media type you  
are using. Change the setting to Low, which helps reduce the heat in the fusing process.  
224 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Vertical white lines  
Figure 12-83 Vertical white lines  
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
2. Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See  
3. Replace the print cartridge.  
Tire tracks  
Figure 12-84 Tire tracks  
A
a
B
c
c
c
c
c
A
a
B
c
c
c
c
c
b
C
C
C
C
b
B
b
C
C
C
C
A
a
B
b
A
a
A
a
B
A
a
B
b
B
b
B C  
b
b
B
b
A
a
A
a
A
a
A
a
B C  
b
This defect typically occurs when the print cartridge has far exceeded its rated life. For example, if you  
are printing a very large quantity of pages with very little toner coverage.  
1. Replace the print cartridge.  
2. Reduce the number of pages that you print with very low toner coverage.  
White spots on black  
Figure 12-85 White spots on black  
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
2. Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See  
ENWW  
Solve print-quality problems 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating  
4. Replace the print cartridge.  
Scattered lines  
Figure 12-86 Scattered lines  
1. Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See  
2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating  
3. Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.  
4. Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. Open the Print Quality submenu and  
change the Toner Density setting. See Print Quality menu on page 42.  
Blurred print  
Figure 12-87 Blurred print  
1. Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications. See  
2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met. See Operating  
3. Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.  
4. Do not use media that already has been run through the device.  
5. Decrease the toner density. Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. Open the  
Print Quality submenu and change the Toner Density setting. See Print Quality menu  
226 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Random image repetition  
Figure 12-88 Random image repetition (1 of 2)  
Figure 12-89 Random image repetition (2 of 2)  
If an image that appears at the top of the page (in solid black) repeats further down the page (in a gray  
field), the toner might not have been completely erased from the last job. (The repeated image might  
be lighter or darker than the field it appears in.)  
Change the tone (darkness) of the field that the repeated image appears in.  
Change the order in which the images are printed. For example, have the lighter image at the top  
of the page, and the darker image farther down the page.  
From your software program, rotate the whole page 180° to print the lighter image first.  
If the defect occurs later in a print job, turn the device off for 10 minutes, and then turn it on to  
restart the print job.  
ENWW  
Solve print-quality problems 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Solve fax problems  
For help solving fax problems, see the Analog Fax Accessory 300 Fax Guide and the Analog Fax  
Accessory 300 Send Fax Driver Guide, which are included on the software CD that came with the fax  
accessory.  
228 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Solve copy problems  
Prevent copy problems  
The following are a few simple steps you can take to improve copy quality:  
Copy from the flatbed scanner. This will produce a higher quality copy than copying from the  
automatic document feeder (ADF).  
Use quality originals.  
Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew, causing unclear images  
and problems with the OCR program. See Load paper and print media on page 85 for instructions.  
Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.  
Image problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Images are missing or faded.  
The print cartridge might be defective.  
Replace the print cartridge. See Manage  
The original might be of poor quality.  
If your original is too light or damaged,  
the copy might not be able to  
compensate, even if you adjust the  
darkness. If possible, find an original  
document in better condition.  
The original might have a colored  
background.  
Touch Copy, and then touch Image  
Adjustment. Adjust the Background  
Cleanup slider to the right to decrease  
the background.  
Vertical white or faded stripes appear on The media might not meet  
Use media that meets HP specifications.  
the copy.  
HP specifications.  
The print cartridge might be defective.  
Replace the print cartridge. See Manage  
Unwanted lines appear on the copy.  
The flatbed scanner or the ADF glass  
might be dirty.  
Clean the flatbed scanner or the ADF  
The photosensitive drum inside the print Install a new HP print cartridge. See  
cartridge might have been scratched. Manage supplies on page 179.  
Black dots or streaks appear on the  
copy.  
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted Clean the device. See Clean the MFP  
substance might be on the automatic  
document feeder (ADF) or flatbed  
scanner.  
Copies are too light or dark.  
Text is unclear.  
The darkness setting needs to be  
adjusted.  
Touch Copy, and then touch Image  
Adjustment. Adjust the Darkness slider  
to lighten or darken the image.  
The sharpness setting needs to be  
adjusted.  
To adjust the sharpness, touch Copy,  
and then touch Image Adjustment.  
Adjust the Sharpness slider to the right to  
increase the sharpness.  
The image should be optimized for text.  
ENWW  
Solve copy problems 229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
To optimize the image for text, touch  
Copy and then touch Optimize Text/  
Picture. Select Text.  
Media-handling problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Poor print quality or toner adhesion  
The paper is too moist, too rough, too  
heavy or too smooth, or it is embossed  
or from a faulty paper lot.  
Try another kind of paper, between 100  
and 250 Sheffield, 4 to 6% moisture  
content. Use only media that meets the  
specifications outlined in the  
The fuser levers are not in the correct  
position.  
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media  
Guide. This guide is available at  
Verify that the fuser levers are in the  
down position (unless printing on  
envelopes).  
Dropouts, jamming, or curl  
The paper has been stored incorrectly.  
Store paper flat in its moisture-proof  
wrapping.  
The paper has variability from one side  
to the other.  
Turn the paper over.  
Excessive curl  
The paper is too moist, has the wrong  
grain direction, or is of short-grain  
construction  
Try changing the fuser mode (see Print  
Quality menu on page 42) or use long-  
grain paper.  
The paper varies from side-to-side.  
The paper has cutouts or perforations.  
Turn the paper over.  
Jamming, damage to device  
Problems with feeding  
Use paper that is free of cutouts or  
perforations.  
The paper has ragged edges.  
Use high-quality paper that is made for  
laser printers.  
The paper varies from side-to-side.  
Turn the paper over.  
The paper is too moist, too rough, too  
heavy or too smooth, has the wrong grain  
direction, or is of short-grain construction  
or it is embossed or from a faulty paper  
lot.  
Try another kind of paper, between  
100 and 250 Sheffield, 4 to 6%  
moisture content.  
Use long-grain paper.  
230 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Print is crooked or misaligned on the  
page.  
The media guides might be incorrectly  
adjusted.  
Remove all media from the input tray,  
straighten the stack, and then load the  
media in the input tray again. Adjust the  
media guides to the width and length of  
the media that you are using and try  
printing again.  
The scanner might require a calibration. Perform a tray alignment and then  
calibrate the scanner.  
Perform a tray alignment by  
opening the Administration menu at  
the device control panel. On the  
Print Qualitysubmenu, touch Set  
Registration. Choose a tray under  
Source and then run a test page.  
For more information, see Print  
on page 177 for information about  
calibrating the scanner.  
More than one sheet feeds at one time. The media tray might be overloaded.  
Remove some of the media from the tray.  
The media might be wrinkled, folded, or Verify that the media is not wrinkled,  
damaged.  
folded, or damaged. Try printing on  
media from a new or different package.  
The device does not pull media from a  
media tray.  
The device might be in manual feed  
mode.  
If Manual Feed appears on the  
control-panel display, press OK to  
print the job.  
Verify that the device is not in  
manual feed mode, and then print  
your job again.  
The pickup roller might be dirty or  
damaged.  
Contact HP Customer Care. See  
support flyer that came in the device box.  
The paper-length adjustment control in  
Adjust the paper-length adjustment  
the tray is set at a length that is greater control to the correct length.  
than the media size.  
ENWW  
Solve copy problems 231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Performance problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
No copy came out.  
The input tray might be empty.  
Load media in the device.  
The original might have been loaded  
incorrectly.  
Load the original face down in the ADF  
or flatbed scanner.  
Copies are blank.  
The sealing tape might not have been  
properly removed from the cartridge.  
Replace the print cartridge and return the  
defective cartridge.  
The original might have been loaded  
incorrectly.  
Load the original face down in the ADF  
or flatbed scanner.  
The media might not meet  
HP specifications.  
Use media that meets HP specifications.  
The print cartridge is defective.  
The ADF might be loaded.  
Replace the print cartridge.  
The wrong original was copied.  
Copies are reduced in size.  
Make sure that the ADF is empty.  
The device software settings might be  
set to reduce the scanned image.  
See the device software Help for more  
information about changing the settings.  
232 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Solve e-mail problems  
If you are unable to send e-mails by using the digital-send feature, you might need to reconfigure the  
SMTP gateway address or the LDAP gateway address. Print a configuration page to find the current  
SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses. See Information pages on page 150. Use the following  
procedures to check if the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses are valid.  
Validate the SMTP gateway address  
NOTE: This procedure is for Windows operating systems.  
1. Open an MS-DOS command prompt: click Start, click Run, and then type cmd.  
2. Type telnetfollowed by the SMTP gateway address and then the number 25, which is the port  
over which the MFP is communicating. For example, type telnet 123.123.123.123 25where  
"123.123.123.123" represents the SMTP gateway address.  
3. Press Enter. If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, the response contains the message Could  
not open connection to the host on port 25: Connect Failed.  
4. If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.  
Validate the LDAP gateway address  
NOTE: This procedure is for Windows operating systems.  
1. Open Windows Explorer. In the address bar, type LDAP://immediately followed by the LDAP  
gateway address. For example, type LDAP://12.12.12.12where "12.12.12.12" represents the  
LDAP gateway address.  
2. Press Enter. If the LDAP gateway address is valid, the Find People dialog box opens.  
3. If the LDAP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.  
ENWW  
Solve e-mail problems 233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Solve network connectivity problems  
If the MFP is having problems communicating with the network, use the information in this section to  
resolve the problem.  
Solve network printing problems  
NOTE: HP recommends that you use the MFP CD to install and set up the MFP on a network.  
Make sure that the network cable is securely seated into the formatter RJ45 connector.  
Make sure that the Link LED on the formatter RJ45 connector is lit and is flashing.  
Make sure that the I/O card is ready. Print a configuration page (see Information pages  
on page 150). If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, printing a configuration page also prints  
a second page that shows the network settings and status.  
NOTE: The HP Jetdirect print server supports various network protocols (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX,  
Novell NetWare, AppleTalk, and DCL/LLC). Make sure that the correct protocols and network  
parameters are set correctly.  
On the HP Jetdirect configuration page, verify the following items for your protocol:  
Under HP Jetdirect Configuration, the status is "I/O Card Ready".  
Protocol status is "Ready".  
An IP address is listed.  
The configuration method (Config by:) is listed correctly. See the network administrator if you  
are not sure which method is correct.  
Try printing the job from another computer.  
To verify that a MFP works with a computer, use a parallel cable to connect it directly to a computer.  
You will have to reinstall the printing software. Print a document from a program that has printed  
correctly in the past. If this works, a problem with the network might exist.  
Contact your network administrator for assistance.  
Verify communication over the network  
If the HP Jetdirect configuration page shows an IP address for the MFP, use this procedure to verify  
that you can communicate with the MFP over the network.  
1. Windows: Click Start, click Run, and then type cmd. An MS-DOS command prompt opens.  
-or-  
Mac: Click Applications, click Utilities, and then open the Terminal application. The terminal  
window opens.  
2. Type pingfollowed by the IP address. For example, type ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXXwhere  
"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IPv4 address that is shown on the HP Jetdirect configuration page. If  
the MFP is communicating over the network, the response is a list of replies from the MFP.  
3. Verify that the IP address is not a duplicate address on the network by using the address resolution  
protocol (arp -a) command. At the prompt, type arp -a. Find the IP address in the list and compare  
234 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
its physical address to the hardware address that is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page  
in the section called HP Jetdirect Configuration. If the addresses match, all network  
communications are valid.  
4. If you cannot verify that the MFP is communicating over the network, contact the network  
administrator.  
ENWW  
Solve network connectivity problems 235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Solve common Macintosh problems  
This section lists problems that can occur when using Mac OS X.  
Table 12-1 Problems with Mac OS X  
The printer driver is not listed in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
Cause  
Solution  
The printer software might not have been installed or was installed  
incorrectly.  
Make sure that the printer PPD is in the following hard-drive folder:  
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/  
<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for  
the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software.  
See the getting started guide for instructions.  
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.  
Delete the PPD file from the following hard-drive folder: Library/  
Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj,  
where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that  
you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide  
for instructions.  
The printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous/Bonjour host name does not appear in the printer list in the Print Center or Printer  
Setup Utility.  
Cause  
Solution  
The printer might not be ready.  
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the printer is on,  
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or  
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different  
port.  
The wrong connection type might be selected.  
Make sure that USB, IP Printing, or Rendezvous is selected,  
depending on the type of connection that exists between the printer  
and the computer.  
The wrong printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous/Bonjour host  
name is being used.  
Print a configuration page in order to check the printer name, IP  
address, or Rendezvous host name. Verify that the name, IP address,  
or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the  
printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print  
Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.  
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.  
The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
Cause  
Solution  
The printer might not be ready.  
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the printer is on,  
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or  
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different  
port.  
The printer software might not have been installed or was installed  
incorrectly.  
Make sure that the printer PPD is in the following hard-drive folder:  
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/  
<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for  
the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software.  
See the getting started guide for instructions.  
236 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Table 12-1 Problems with Mac OS X (continued)  
The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
Cause  
Solution  
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.  
Delete the PPD file from the following hard-drive folder: Library/  
Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj,  
where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that  
you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide  
for instructions.  
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.  
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.  
A print job was not sent to the printer that you wanted.  
Cause  
Solution  
The print queue might be stopped.  
Restart the print queue. Open print monitor and select Start Jobs.  
The wrong printer name or IP address is being used. Another printer Print a configuration page in order to check the printer name, IP  
with the same or similar name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name address, or Rendezvous host name. Verify that the name, IP address,  
might have received your print job.  
or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the  
printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print  
Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
An encapsulated postscript (EPS) file does not print with the correct fonts.  
Cause  
Solution  
This problem occurs with some programs.  
Try downloading the fonts that are contained in the EPS file to  
the printer before printing.  
Send the file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding.  
You are unable to print from a third-party USB card.  
Cause  
Solution  
This error occurs when the software for USB printers is not  
installed.  
When adding a third-party USB card, you might need the Apple USB  
Adapter Card Support software. The most current version of this  
software is available from the Apple Web site.  
When connected with a USB cable, the printer does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected.  
Cause  
Solution  
This problem is caused by either a software or a hardware  
component.  
Software troubleshooting  
Check that your Macintosh supports USB.  
Verify that your Macintosh operating system is Mac OS X v10.1  
or later.  
Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software  
from Apple.  
ENWW  
Solve common Macintosh problems 237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Table 12-1 Problems with Mac OS X (continued)  
When connected with a USB cable, the printer does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected.  
Cause  
Solution  
Hardware troubleshooting  
Check that the printer is turned on.  
Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly.  
Check that you are using the appropriate high-speed USB cable.  
Ensure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing  
power from the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the  
chain, and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host  
computer.  
Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are  
connected in a row on the chain. Disconnect all of the devices  
from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on  
the host computer.  
NOTE: The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub.  
238 Chapter 12 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Supplies and accessories  
This section provides information about ordering parts, supplies, and accessories. Use only parts and  
accessories that are specifically designed for this device.  
ENWW  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Order parts, accessories, and supplies  
Several methods are available for ordering parts, supplies, and accessories:  
Order directly from HP  
You can obtain the following items directly from HP:  
Replacement parts: To order replacement parts in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/hpparts.  
Outside the United States, order parts by contacting your local authorized HP service center.  
Supplies and accessories: To order supplies in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies. To  
order supplies worldwide, go to www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html. To order accessories, go to  
Order through service or support providers  
To order a part or accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.  
Order directly through the embedded Web server (for printers that are  
connected to a network)  
Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server.  
1. In the Web browser on the computer, type the IP address or host name of the device. The status  
window opens.  
2. In the Other links area, double-click Order Supplies. This provides a URL for a site from which  
you can purchase consumables.  
3. Select the part numbers that you want to order, and follow the instructions on the screen.  
Order directly through the HP Easy Printer Care software  
HP Easy Printer Care software is a printer management tool designed to make printer configuration,  
monitoring, supplies ordering, troubleshooting, and updating as simple and efficient as possible. For  
more information about HP Easy Printer Care software, go to www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare.  
240 Appendix A Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Part numbers  
Type of item  
Item  
Description or use  
Order number  
Paper handling  
3,000-sheet stacker  
One 3,000-sheet stacking  
device. The device also offers  
job offset capabilities.  
C8084A  
3,000-sheet stapler/stacker  
Multifunction finisher  
8-bin mailbox  
One 3,000-sheet stacking  
device provides stapling for as  
many as 50 sheets of paper  
per document. The device  
also offers job offset  
C8085A  
capabilities.  
Finishing device that provides C8088B  
1,000 sheets of stacker  
capacity, stapling, for up to 50  
sheets of paper, and folding  
saddle-stitching for booklets  
up to 10 sheets of paper.  
A device that provides a face- Q5693A  
up bin (upper bin) and eight  
face-down bins that can be  
assignedto individual users or  
workgroups. The device also  
functions as a job separator,  
stacker, and sorter/collator.  
Printing supplies  
Print cartridge (average of  
30,000 pages in accordance  
with ISO/IEC 19752)  
Replacement HP maximum  
capacity, smart print  
cartridge.  
C8543X  
Staple cartridge  
Replacement HP 5,000 staple C8091A  
cartridge for the 3,000-sheet  
stapler/stacker.  
Staple cartridge  
Replacement HP 5,000 staple C8092A  
cartridge for the multifunction  
finisher.  
Memory  
SDRAM Double Data Rate  
The MFP has two memory  
Q7715A (64 MB)  
(DDR) memory DIMMs (100- DIMM slots. One is used by  
Q7718A (128 MB)  
Q7719A (256 MB)  
Q7720A (512 MB)  
pin)  
factory-installed memory.  
Improves the ability of the  
MFP to handle large and  
stored jobs (maximum 512  
MB with HP brand DDR  
DIMMs).  
ENWW  
Part numbers 241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Type of item  
Item  
Description or use  
Order number  
Cable and interface  
accessories  
Enhanced EIO Cards  
HP Jetdirect Connectivity  
Card for USB, serial, and  
LocalTalk connectivity  
J4135A  
HP Jetdirect 615N Print  
Server for Fast Ethernet  
(10/100Base-TX) networks  
(RJ-45 only)  
J6057A  
HP 680N Wireless 802.11b  
connectivity  
J6058A  
J7960A  
HP Jetdirect 625N Print  
Server for Fast Ethernet  
(10/100/1000Base-TX  
networks)  
Analog fax  
A customer-installable  
Q3701A  
T196AA  
accessory that enables the  
MFP to function as a stand-  
alone analog fax machine.  
Additional software features  
Maintenance kit  
HP Digital Sending Software A software accessory with  
enhanced digital sending  
features including network  
authentication.  
Printer maintenance kit  
The kit contains two Type 1  
rollers, seven Type 2 rollers,  
one transfer roller assembly,  
and one fuser assembly.  
C9152A (110 volt)  
C9153A (220 volt)  
242 Appendix A Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
B Service and support  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement  
HP PRODUCT  
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY  
HP LaserJet M9040 MFP and HP LaserJet M9050 MFP  
One-year on-site warranty  
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials  
and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects  
during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.  
Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.  
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase,  
for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If  
HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute  
its programming instructions due to such defects.  
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a  
reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of  
the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.  
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to  
incidental use.  
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b)  
software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation  
outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or  
maintenance.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER  
WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP  
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,  
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or  
provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might  
not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from  
country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/  
region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The  
level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function  
of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory  
reasons.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR  
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS  
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL  
ENWW  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR  
OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or  
consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.  
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY  
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY  
STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.  
Customer self repair warranty service  
HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and  
allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period, HP  
identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to  
you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is  
mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs  
of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for  
Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no  
additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product.  
Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day  
delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography  
permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will  
help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether  
a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP,  
you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business  
days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping  
material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a  
customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to  
be used.  
244 Appendix B Service and support  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Print cartridge limited warranty statement  
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.  
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or  
tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or  
operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the device product or (c) exhibit wear  
from ordinary use.  
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of  
the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace  
products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO  
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR  
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE  
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR  
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.  
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT  
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO  
THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.  
ENWW  
Print cartridge limited warranty statement 245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HP Customer Care  
Online Services  
For 24-hour access to updated HP device-specific software, product information, and support  
information through an Internet connection, go to the Web site: www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or  
Go to www.hp.com/support/net_printing for information about the HP Jetdirect external print server.  
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) is a suite of Web-based troubleshooting tools for desktop  
computing and printing products. Go to instantsupport.hp.com.  
Telephone support  
HP provides free telephone support during the warranty period. For the telephone number for your  
country/region, see the flyer that shipped with the device, or visit www.hp.com/support. Before calling  
HP, have the following information ready: the product name and serial number, the date of purchase,  
and a description of the problem.  
Software utilities, drivers, and electronic information  
The Web page for the drivers is in English, but you can download the drivers themselves in several  
languages.  
HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies  
Asia-Pacific: www.hp.com/paper  
To order genuine HP parts or accessories, go to the HP Parts Store at www.hp.com/buy/parts (U.S. and  
Canada only), or call 1-800-538-8787 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3154 (Canada).  
HP service information  
To locate HP-Authorized Dealers, call 1-800-243-9816 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3867 (Canada).  
Outside the United States and Canada, call the customer support number for your country/region. See  
the flyer that shipped in the box with the device.  
HP service agreements  
Call 1-800-HPINVENT (1-800-474-6836 (U.S.)) or 1-800-268-1221 (Canada). Or, go to the HP  
SupportPack and CarepaqTM Services Web site at www.hpexpress-services.com/10467a.  
For extended service, call 1-800-446-0522.  
246 Appendix B Service and support  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
HP Easy Printer Care  
To check the device status and settings and view troubleshooting information and online documentation,  
use the HP Easy Printer Care. You must have performed a full software installation in order to use the  
HP Easy Printer Care. See HP Easy Printer Care on page 156.  
HP support and information for Macintosh computers  
Go to www.hp.com/go/macosx for Macintosh OS X support information and HP subscription service for  
driver updates.  
Go to www.hp.com/go/mac-connect for products that are designed specifically for the Macintosh user.  
ENWW  
HP Customer Care 247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
248 Appendix B Service and support  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C Specifications  
ENWW  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Physical specifications  
Table C-1 Dimensions  
Model  
Height  
Depth  
Width  
Weight1  
HP LaserJet M9040 MFP  
HP LaserJet M9050 MFP  
1219 mm (48 in.)  
1219 mm (48 in.)  
1085 mm (43 in.)  
1085 mm (43 in.)  
1334 mm (53 in.)  
1334 mm (53 in.)  
143 kg (317 lb)  
143 kg (317 lb)  
1
Without print cartridge  
Table C-2 Dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened  
Model  
Height  
Depth  
Width  
HP LaserJet M9040 MFP  
HP LaserJet M9050 MFP  
1664 mm (66 in.)  
1664 mm (66 in.)  
1296 mm (52 in.)  
1296 mm (52 in.)  
2501 mm (98.5 in.)  
2501 mm (98.5 in.)  
250 Appendix C Specifications  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Electrical specifications  
WARNING! Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not  
convert operating voltages. This can damage the device and void the product warranty.  
Table C-3 Power requirements  
Specification  
110-volt models  
220-volt models  
Power requirements  
100 to 127 Vac  
50/60 Hz  
220 to 240 Vac  
50/60 Hz  
Rated current  
12 Amps  
5.3 Amps  
Table C-4 Power consumption (average, in watts)1  
Model  
Printing2  
Copying2  
Ready or  
standby,4  
Sleep 13, 5  
Sleep 2  
Off  
HP LaserJet M9040 MFP  
HP LaserJet M9050 MFP  
1070 W  
1130 W  
1120 W  
1160 W  
305 W  
305 W  
221 W  
221 W  
59 W  
59 W  
0.9 W  
0.9 W  
1
Values are based on preliminary data. See www.hp.com/go/ljm9040mfp/regulatory or www.hp.com/go/ljm9050mfp/  
regulatory for current information.  
2
3
Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages.  
Default time from Ready mode to Sleep 1 = 15 minutes, and to Sleep 2 = 90 minutes (HP LaserJet M9050 MFP) , 60 minutes  
(HP LaserJet M9040 MDP).  
4
5
Heat dissipation in Ready mode = 1045 BTU/hour (HP LaserJet M9050 MFP), 1045 BTU/hour (HP LaserJet M9040 MFP).  
Recovery time from Sleep to start of printing = 20 seconds, and from Sleep 2 to start of printing = 145 seconds.  
ENWW  
Electrical specifications 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Acoustic emissions  
Table C-5 Sound power level1, 2  
Sound power level  
Declared per ISO 9296  
LWAd= 7.4 Bels (A) [74 dB(A)]  
Essentially Inaudible  
Printing3  
Ready  
1
Values are based on preliminary data. See www.hp.com/go/ljm9040mfp/regulatory or www.hp.com/go/ljm9050mfp/  
regulatory for current information.  
2
3
Configuration tested: Base unit printing and scanning continuous with ADF on A4 paper with no output device.  
Print speed is 50 ipm HP LaserJet M9050 MFP and 40 ipm HP LaserJet M9040 MFP.  
Table C-6 Sound pressure level1, 2  
Sound pressure level  
Declared per ISO 9296  
LpAm=58 dB (A)  
Printing/Copying3  
Ready  
Essentially Inaudible  
1
Values subject to change. See www.hp.com/support/ljm9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljm9050mfp for current information.  
Configuration tested: Base unit printing and scanning continuous with ADF on A4 paper with no output device.  
Print speed is 50 ipm HP LaserJet M9050 MFP and 40 ipm HP LaserJet M9040 MFP.  
2
3
Operating environment  
Table C-7 Necessary conditions  
Environmental condition  
Recommended  
Allowed  
Temperature (device and print cartridge) 17.5° to 25.0°C (63° to 77°F)  
Relative humidity 30% to 70%  
0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)  
0% to 95%  
NOTE: Optimum performance of the device is assured under the recommended temperature and  
humidity specifications. Print quality might deteriorate and occurrences of paper jams might increase  
when the device is operated withing the allowed temperature and humidity specifications.  
252 Appendix C Specifications  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCC regulations  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant  
to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio  
frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may  
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference  
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.  
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.  
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.  
NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void  
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.  
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.  
254 Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Environmental product stewardship program  
Protecting the environment  
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound  
manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.  
Ozone production  
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).  
Power consumption  
Power usage drops significantly while in Ready/Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves  
money without affecting the high performance of this product. To determine the ENERGY STAR®  
qualification status for this product see the Product Data Sheet or Specifications Sheet. Qualified  
products are also listed at:  
Toner consumption  
Economode uses significantly less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge.  
Paper use  
This product’s manual/optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple  
pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural  
resources.  
Plastics  
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to  
identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.  
ENWW  
Environmental product stewardship program 255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
HP LaserJet print supplies  
It’s easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges—free of charge—with HP Planet  
Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print  
cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return  
multiple cartridges together rather than separately.  
HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally  
sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you  
participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled  
properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons  
of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be  
returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!  
NOTE: Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this  
label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty  
returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to http://www.hp.com/  
Return and recycling instructions  
United States and Puerto Rico  
The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more  
HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.  
Multiple returns (two to eight cartridges)  
1. Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag.  
2. Tape up to eight single boxes together using strapping or packaging tape (up to 70 lbs).  
3. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.  
OR  
1. Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from the http://www.hp.com/  
recycle or 1-800-340-2445 (holds up to eight HP LaserJet print cartridges).  
2. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.  
Single returns  
1. Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box.  
2. Place the shipping label on the front of the box.  
Shipping  
For all HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, give the package to UPS during your next delivery  
or pickup, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. For the location of your local UPS drop-off  
center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit http://www.ups.com. If you are returning via USPS label, give the  
package to a U.S. Postal Service carrier or drop off at a U.S.Postal Service Office. For more information,  
or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit http://www.hp.com/recycle or call  
1-800-340-2445. Requested UPS pickup will be charged normal pickup rates. Information subject to  
change without notice.  
256 Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Non-US returns  
To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in  
the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new printer supply item) or visit  
http://www.hp.com/recycle. Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet  
printing supplies.  
Paper  
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the  
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper  
according to EN12281:2002.  
ENWW  
Environmental product stewardship program 257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Material restrictions  
This HP product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the scanner and/or control panel liquid  
crystal display that may require special handling at end-of-life.  
This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries  
contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following:  
HP LaserJet M9040 and HP LaserJet M9050 device  
Type  
Carbon monofluoride lithium battery BR1632  
Weight  
1.5 g  
Location  
User-removable  
On formatter board  
No  
For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the  
Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org.  
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the  
European Union  
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with  
your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by  
handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic  
equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will  
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health  
and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for  
recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where  
you purchased the product.  
258 Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)  
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner)  
can be obtained by contacting the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/  
For more information  
To obtain information about these environmental topics:  
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products  
HP’s commitment to the environment  
HP’s environmental management system  
HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program  
Material Safety Data Sheets  
ENWW  
Environmental product stewardship program 259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Country/region specific statements  
Declaration of Conformity  
Declaration of Conformity  
according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1  
Manufacturer's Name:  
Manufacturer's Address:  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
11311 Chinden Boulevard,  
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA  
declares, that the product  
Product Name:  
Including:  
HP LaserJet M9040/ M9050 MFP series  
2000 sheet input feed unit (C8531A)  
8-bin mailbox (Q5693A)(GUADA-0401-00)  
Regulatory Model2):  
Product Options:  
Toner Cartridge  
BOISB-0403-01  
All  
C8543X  
conforms to the following Product Specifications:  
Safety:  
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 + A11  
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)  
GB4943-2001  
CISPR22:2005 / EN 55022:2006 - Class A1, 3)  
EN 61000-3-2:2000 +A2  
EMC:  
EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1  
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2  
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A / ICES-003, Issue 4  
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003  
Supplementary Information:  
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, and  
carries the CE-Marking  
accordingly.  
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation.  
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.  
2) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name  
or the product number(s).  
3) “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be  
required to take adequate measures”.  
Boise, Idaho , USA  
23 July 2007  
For regulatory topics only,  
European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards  
Europe, Herrenberger Straáe 140,, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143), www.hp.com/go/  
certificates  
USA Contact:  
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company,, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160,, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015, USA,  
(Phone: 208-396-6000)  
Laser safety  
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has  
implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is  
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product  
260 Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard  
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the  
device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot  
escape during any phase of normal user operation.  
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified  
in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.  
Canadian DOC regulations  
Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements.  
« Conforme la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilit lectromagntiques. « CEM ». »  
VCCI statement (Japan)  
Power cord statement (Japan)  
EMI statement (Korea)  
EMI statement (Taiwan)  
Laser statement for Finland  
Luokan 1 laserlaite  
Klass 1 Laser Apparat  
ENWW  
Country/region specific statements 261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
HP LaserJet M9040, M9050, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite.  
Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle.  
Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.  
VAROITUS !  
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän  
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.  
VARNING !  
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för  
osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.  
HUOLTO  
HP LaserJet M9040, M9050 - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen  
saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi  
ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa  
lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.  
VARO !  
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa  
toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.  
VARNING !  
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig  
laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:  
Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser.  
262 Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Symbols/Numerics  
3000-sheet stacker  
address books, e-mail  
auto-complete function 138  
LDAP support 134  
address, printer  
Macintosh,  
troubleshooting 236  
ADF  
billing codes report, fax 151  
bins  
capacity  
features  
capacities  
default settings 22  
locating 94  
multifunction finisher 94  
selecting 95  
ordering 241  
3000-sheet stapler/stacker  
bins 94  
capacity  
jams, clearing 199  
sizes supported 137  
ADF (automatic document feeder)  
blank copies, problem-  
solving 232  
ordering 241  
capacity  
cleaning the delivery  
system 172  
cleaning the rollers 175  
cleaning the top glass  
strip 173  
blocked fax list, printing 151  
blurred print, problem-  
solving 226  
Bonjour Settings 64  
booklet bin, multifunction  
finisher 94  
selecting output location 95  
staple cartridge, ordering 241  
staple jams, clearing 208  
stapling documents  
500-sheet input tray  
models including  
8-bin mailbox  
bins 94  
locating  
adhesive labels  
printing 85  
Administration menu, control  
panel 15  
advanced printing options  
Windows 102  
alerts, e-mail 64  
booklets, creating  
books  
copying 128  
both sides, copying  
default settings 17  
both sides, printing on  
blank pages default  
settings 38  
capacity  
features 10  
jams, clearing 211  
ordering 241  
A
alignment settings, trays 42  
alternative letterhead mode 102  
AppleTalk setting 77  
AppleTalk settings 29  
Attention light  
default settings 22  
Macintosh settings 63  
browser requirements  
embedded Web server 152  
buttons, control panel  
locating 12  
A4 paper settings 40  
accessories  
locating  
ordering 240, 241  
accounting hardware 165  
acoustic specifications 252  
activity log, fax 151  
address book, e-mail  
deleting addresses 140  
address books, e-mail  
adding addresses 139  
clearing 46  
locating 12  
authorized dealers 246  
automatic document feeder (ADF)  
cleaning the rollers 175  
misfeeds 175  
automatic two-sided printing path  
copying documents 124  
auxiliary connection  
configuration 73  
sounds, settings 38  
touchscreen 14  
C
calibrating scanner 177  
call report, fax 151  
Canadian DOC regulations 261  
canceling  
recipient lists 139  
recipient lists, creating 139  
copy jobs 130  
B
printing 109  
batteries included 258  
canceling a print request 109  
ENWW  
Index 263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
capacity  
bins  
cards, EIO  
ordering 242  
cartridges  
management menu 25  
copy-screen 120  
Default Job Options menu 17  
default settings 38  
Device Behavior menu 38  
E-mail Setup menu 37  
e-mail screen 136  
Fax Setup menu 34  
help 14  
Courier font settings 40  
cover pages 66, 100  
creased paper, problem-  
solving 224  
crooked pages 223  
curled paper, problem-  
solving 224, 230  
custom paper sizes 83  
custom-size paper  
default settings 22  
custom-size paper settings  
Macintosh 66  
ordering through embedded  
Web server 154  
recycling 256  
Home screen 13  
warranty 245  
Information menu 16  
Initial Setup menu 26  
key press sounds, default  
settings 38  
cartridges, print  
Macintosh status 69  
ordering 241  
customer support  
cartridges, staple  
empty, stop or continue  
settings 105  
lights 12  
embedded Web server  
links 154  
HP Printer Utility pages 63  
online 246  
locating  
locking menus 168  
maintenance messages,  
resetting 181  
jams, clearing from stapler/  
stacker 208  
D
loading 105  
Management menu 25  
messages, numerical list 193  
messages, types of 192  
Print Quality menu 42  
Resets menu 46  
Send Setup menu 37  
Service menu 46  
settings 52, 64  
dark copying 229  
Data light  
characters, misformed 223  
checking toner level  
HP Easy Printer Care  
software 180  
locating 12  
date, setting 23, 169  
Default Job Options menu 17  
default settings  
cleaning  
ADF delivery system 172  
glass 172  
copy 18  
Device Behavior menu 38  
e-mail 20  
originals 17  
MFP 170, 172  
paper path 170  
touch-screen 172  
clearing jams  
stapler head 207  
clock  
Time/Scheduling menu 23  
touchscreen buttons 14  
troubleshooting 191  
controlling print jobs 92  
copies, number of  
Windows 102  
Copitrak devices 165  
copying  
print 22  
Resets menu 46  
Send to Folder 21  
delay, sleep 186  
density  
problem-solving 218  
settings 42, 63  
Device Behavior menu 38  
device status  
setting 169  
clothing, washing toner off 171  
collating copies 127  
colored text  
print as black 102  
configuration page  
Information menu 16  
Macintosh 63  
books 128  
canceling 130  
collating 127  
control-panel navigation 120  
default settings 17, 18  
features 4, 119  
Macintosh Services tab 69  
diagnostics  
networks 29  
digital faxing 148  
digital sending  
printing 150  
configurations, models  
connectivity  
auxiliary 73  
USB 72  
contacting HP 246  
control panel  
interrupting jobs 39  
Job Mode 129  
media, problem-solving 230  
multiple originals 129  
photos 128  
problem-solving 232  
problems, preventing 229  
quality, problem-solving 229  
size, problem-solving 232  
two-sided documents 124  
address books 139  
configuring e-mail 134  
control-panel settings 136  
default settings 21  
folders 142  
Administration menu 15  
buttons 12  
cleaning page, printing 170  
job settings 141  
264 Index  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LDAP support 134  
loading documents 137  
recipient lists 139  
sending documents 137  
Setup menu 37  
SMTP support 134  
troubleshooting 191  
validating gateway  
addresses 233  
dropouts, problem-solving 219  
duplex printing  
Windows 101  
duplex printing accessory  
environment, specifications 180  
environmental stewardship  
program 255  
EPS files, troubleshooting 237  
Equitrac devices 165  
erasing hard disk 166  
Error button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
locating  
duplexer  
Macintosh settings 63  
duplexing  
blank pages, default  
settings 38  
error messages  
workflow 143  
default settings 38  
Digital Sending tab, embedded  
Web server 154  
DIMMs  
copying documents 124  
default settings 22  
e-mail alerts 64  
maintenance, resetting 181  
numerical list 193  
duty cycle  
expansion options  
installing 182  
ordering 241  
slots 182  
types of 192  
Ethernet support  
E
e-mail  
European Union, waste  
disposal 258  
Explorer, versions supported  
embedded Web server 152  
e-mail  
address books 139  
configuring 134  
default settings 20  
sending documents 137  
troubleshooting 191  
validating gateway  
addresses 233  
verifying installation 185  
Disk Erase feature 166  
disposal, end-of-life 258  
DLC/LLC settings 29  
document feeder  
address books 139  
auto-complete function 138  
control-panel settings 136  
job settings 141  
copying two-sided  
documents 124  
e-mail alerts 64  
E-mail Setup menu 37  
Economode 42  
doors  
LDAP support 134  
loading documents 137  
recipient lists 139  
jam locations 194  
left, clearing jams 210  
economy settings 186  
EIO cards  
locating  
right, clearing jams 197  
dots per inch (dpi)  
sending documents 137  
SMTP support 134  
included  
ordering 242  
slots, locating  
F
dots, problem-solving 219, 225,  
fans, troubleshooting 191  
EIO disk  
features  
locking 167  
electrical specifications 251  
embedded Web server  
assigning a password 165  
checking toner level 180  
features 152  
FastRes  
fax accessory  
connecting phone line 146  
printing schedule 24  
Fax Activity Log  
double-sided copying  
default settings 17  
double-sided printing  
blank pages, default  
settings 38  
default settings 22  
Macintosh settings 63  
dpi, settings 42, 63  
drivers  
clearing 46  
fax card, ordering 242  
fax reports, printing 16, 151  
Fax Setup menu 34  
faxing, digital 148  
FCC regulations 254  
end-of-life disposal 258  
energy specifications 251  
envelopes  
Macintosh settings 66  
Macintosh,  
jams 215  
printing 110  
features  
troubleshooting 236  
presets (Macintosh) 66  
settings 52, 53, 64  
shortcuts (Windows) 100  
supported 49  
feeding problems, media 230  
file directory, printing 150  
File Upload, Macintosh 63  
Finnish laser safety  
wrinkled, problem-solving 224  
environment for device  
problem-solving 217  
environment for printer  
specifications 252  
statement 261  
universal 50  
Windows, opening 100  
ENWW  
Index 265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
firmware  
updates  
HP Digital Sending software,  
ordering 242  
installing  
Macintosh software for direct  
Firmware Update, Macintosh 63  
first page  
HP Easy Printer Care  
description 56  
connections 60, 61  
Macintosh software on  
networks 61, 62  
speed, specifications  
downloading 56  
use different paper 66  
flash memory  
upgrading 182  
folders  
default settings 21  
sending to 142  
fonts  
Courier settings 40  
EPS files, troubleshooting 237  
list, printing 16, 151  
Upload Macintosh 63  
Foreign Interface Harness  
(FIH) 165  
opening 156  
options 156  
supported browsers 56  
supported operating  
systems 56  
memory 182  
printer maintenance kit 181  
Instant Support Professional  
Edition (ISPE) 246  
Internet Explorer, versions  
supported  
embedded Web server 152  
Internet fax 148  
IP address  
changing 74  
Macintosh,  
troubleshooting 236  
IPX/SPX setting 28, 76  
HP Easy Printer Care Software  
using 156  
HP Easy Printer Care software  
HP fraud hotline 179  
HP Instant Support Professional  
Edition (ISPE) 246  
HP Jetdirect print server  
configuring 77  
front door  
J
jams  
jam locations 194  
models including  
settings 26  
locating  
envelopes 215  
frequent 212  
locations 194  
FTP, sending to 143  
fuser  
HP Printer Utility 63  
HP Universal Print Driver 50  
HP Web Jetadmin  
modes 42  
print quality after 217  
recovery settings 38  
trays, clearing 196  
jams, paper  
warranty 245  
checking toner level 180  
HP-Authorized Dealers 246  
HP-UX software 58  
humidity  
G
gateways  
configuring 134  
testing 135  
multifunction finisher 201,  
problem-solving 217  
specifications 252  
validating addresses 233  
glass  
sizes supported 137  
graphical display, control  
panel 12  
preventing 85  
stacker or stapler/stacker 199  
jams, staple  
stapler/stacker 208  
Japanese VCCI statement 261  
Jetadmin, HP Web 56, 159  
Jetdirect print server  
configuring 77  
humidity requirements 180  
I
I/O configuration  
network configuration 74  
settings 26  
gray background, problem-  
solving 220  
image quality  
copy, improving 229  
copy, problem-solving 229  
settings 42  
H
models including  
settings 26  
hard disk  
erasing 166  
held jobs 114  
image reptition, problem-  
solving 227  
Job Mode, copying 129  
job storage  
Help button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
help, control panel 14  
Home button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
images per minute  
accessing 113  
features 113  
Macintosh settings 69  
personal 114  
proof and hold 114  
QuickCopy 115  
settings 25  
inactivity timeout 38  
Information menu 16  
information pages 150  
Information tab, embedded Web  
server 153  
Home screen, control panel 13  
HP Customer Care 246  
Initial Setup menu 26  
stored 116  
266 Index  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
jobs  
Macintosh settings 63  
drivers, troubleshooting 236  
HP Printer Utility 63  
installing printing system for  
direct connections 60, 61  
installing printing system for  
networks 61, 62  
problems,  
troubleshooting 236  
removing software 65  
resize documents 66  
software 60  
Memory Enhancement technology  
(MEt)  
Menu button 12  
menu map  
K
keys, control panel  
locating 12  
sounds, settings 38  
touchscreen 14  
Korean EMI statement 261  
Information menu 16  
printing 150  
menus, control panel  
Administration 15  
Default Job Options 17  
Device Behavior 38  
E-mail Setup 37  
Fax Setup 34  
L
LAN connector  
LAN fax 148  
staple options 68  
support 247  
supported operating  
systems 60  
Information 16  
Initial Setup 26  
locking 168  
Management 25  
Print Quality 42  
Resets 46  
landscape orientation  
setting, Windows 101  
language  
default, setting 38  
language, control panel 191  
language, printer  
default settings 40  
laser safety statements 260, 261  
LDAP servers  
USB card,  
troubleshooting 237  
Macintosh driver settings  
custom-size paper 66  
Job Storage 69  
Services tab 69  
watermarks 67  
maintenance kit  
ordering 242  
Management menu 25  
margins  
registration, setting 42  
material restrictions 258  
Material Safety Data Sheet  
(MSDS) 259  
Send Setup 37  
Service 46  
Time/Scheduling 23  
mercury-free product 258  
messages  
connecting to 134  
validating gateway  
addresses 233  
default settings 38  
e-mail alerts 64  
numerical list 193  
types of 192  
letterhead paper, loading 102  
light copying 229  
light print  
problem-solving 218  
lights  
control panel 12  
lines, problem-solving  
copies 229  
link speed settings 32  
Linux software 58  
loading  
microprocessor speed  
misfeeds in ADF 175  
misformed characters, problem-  
solving 223  
media  
A4 settings 40  
models, features  
multifeeds 231  
custom, loading 89  
custom-size, Macintosh  
settings 66  
multifunction finisher  
capacity  
ordering 241  
documents, sizes  
supported 137  
default size, selecting 22  
first page 66  
staple cartridge, ordering 241  
using  
scanner glass 137  
sizes supported 137  
staples 105  
fuser modes 42  
loading 85  
pages per sheet 67  
problem-solving 217, 230  
skewed 223  
multiple pages per sheet  
Windows 101  
LocalTalk connection  
N
Lock Resources, Macintosh 63  
locking  
control panel menus 168  
loose toner, problem-solving 221  
n-up printing  
Windows 101  
Netscape Navigator, versions  
supported  
supported sizes 81  
wrinkled 224  
memory  
embedded Web server 152  
Network Folder, scan to 142  
Networking tab, embedded Web  
server 154  
adding 182  
M
included  
Macintosh  
managing 182  
upgrading 182  
AppleTalk settings 29  
driver settings 64, 66  
ENWW  
Index 267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
networks  
AppleTalk settings 29  
copy, problem-solving 229  
settings 42  
ports  
troubleshooting  
Macintosh 237  
power  
troubleshooting 190  
power specifications 251  
presets (Macintosh) 66  
print cartridge  
configuring 74  
configuring gateway  
addresses 134  
default gateway 75  
diagnostics 29  
disabling DLC/LLC 77  
disabling protocols 76  
DLC/LLC settings 29  
HP Web Jetadmin 159  
IP address 74  
IPX/SPX settings 28  
link speed settings 32  
Macintosh installation 61, 62  
Macintosh settings 64  
P
page order, changing 102  
pages per sheet  
Windows 101  
paper  
A4 settings 40  
covers, using different  
paper 100  
custom size, selecting 100  
custom sizes 83  
custom-size, Macintosh  
settings 66  
authentication 179  
checking toner levels 180  
genuine HP 179  
life expectancy 180  
managing 179  
non-HP 179  
storing 179  
print cartridges  
default size, selecting 22  
first and last pages, using  
different paper 100  
first page 66  
fuser modes 42  
pages per sheet 67  
problem-solving 217, 230  
size, selecting 100  
skewed 223  
print servers included  
protocol configuration page,  
printing 33  
security 29  
SMTP servers 134  
subnet mask 75  
TCP/IP parameters 74  
TCP/IP settings 26  
testing SMTP settings 135  
troubleshooting printing 234  
validating gateway  
Macintosh status 69  
management menu 25  
ordering through embedded  
Web server 154  
recycling 256  
warranty 245  
print jobs  
default settings 22  
print media  
supported 81  
print on both sides  
Windows 101  
supported sizes 81  
type, selecting 100  
wrinkled 224  
addresses 233  
paper path  
noise specifications 252  
number of copies  
print quality  
cleaning 170  
blurred 226  
pausing a print request 109  
PCL drivers  
default settings 18  
dropouts 219  
environment 217  
gray background 220  
jams, after 217  
light print 218  
lines 220  
loose toner 221  
media 217  
misformed characters 223  
repeating defects 222  
repetitive images 227  
scattered lines 226  
smeared toner 221  
specks 219  
O
default settings 40  
universal 50  
PDF error pages 40  
Perform Printer Maintenance  
message 181  
personal jobs 114  
personality  
default settings 40  
phone line, connecting fax  
accessory 146  
online help, control panel 14  
online support 246  
operating environment  
specifications 180, 252  
operating systems supported 48,  
ordering  
supplies and accessories 240  
supplies through embedded  
Web server 154  
orientation  
photos  
copying 128  
setting, Windows 101  
output bin  
selecting, Windows 101  
output quality  
loading 137  
tire tracks 225  
physical specifications 250  
PINs, personal jobs 114  
portrait orientation  
setting, Windows 101  
troubleshooting 217  
white lines 225  
white spots 225  
Print Quality menu, control  
panel 42  
copy, improving 229  
268 Index  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
print server  
Quick Sets 100  
scanning e-mail  
priority, settings 52, 64  
private jobs  
validating gateway  
addresses 233  
R
Ready light  
Windows 102  
problem-solving  
scanning to e-mail  
about 133, 137  
locating 12  
real-time clock 169  
recipient lists 139  
recycling  
HP printing supplies returns and  
environmental program 256  
registration, tray alignment 42  
removing Macintosh software 65  
repeating defects, problem-  
solving 222, 227  
replacing  
staple cartridges 105  
reset button 12  
Resets menu, control panel 46  
resize documents  
Macintosh 66  
blurred print 226  
copy quality 229  
copy size 232  
copying 229, 232  
curled paper 224  
dropouts 219  
address books 139  
configuring 134  
default settings 20  
sending documents 137  
troubleshooting 191  
scanning to e-mail  
address books 139  
control-panel settings 136  
job settings 141  
LDAP support 134  
loading documents 137  
recipient lists 139  
sending documents 137  
SMTP support 134  
scanning to folder 142  
scanning to workflow 143  
Secure Disk Erase 166  
security  
e-mail alerts 64  
environment 217  
Error button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
gray background 220  
light print 218  
lines, copies 229  
media 217, 230  
messages, types of 192  
networks 29  
repeating defects 222  
repetitive images 227  
scattered lines 226  
skewed pages 223  
smeared toner 221  
specks 219  
Windows 101  
resolution  
settings 42, 63  
troubleshooting quality 217  
Resolution Enhancement  
technology (REt) 42, 63  
REt (Resolution Enhancement  
technology 42  
disk erase 166  
Foreign Interface Harness  
(FIH) 165  
locking control panel  
menus 168  
REt (Resolution Enhancement  
technology) 63  
retention, job  
text quality 223, 226  
tire tracks 225  
white spots 225  
wrinkled paper 224  
product status  
settings 29  
Send Setup menu 37  
Send to Folder 142  
Send to Workflow 143  
sending to e-mail  
accessing 113  
features 113  
personal 114  
proof and hold 114  
QuickCopy 115  
HP Easy Printer Care 156  
proof and hold  
address books 139  
default settings 20  
sending documents 137  
troubleshooting 191  
validating gateway  
addresses 233  
Windows 102  
stored 116  
proof and hold jobs 114  
protocol configuration page,  
printing 33  
PS emulation driver  
default settings 40  
PS Emulation drivers 49  
PS error pages  
right door  
locating  
S
sending to e-mail  
saddle stitching  
address books 139  
job settings 141  
safety statements 260, 261  
scale documents  
Macintosh 66  
Windows 101  
scanner calibration 177  
scanning  
default settings 40  
LDAP support 134  
loading documents 137  
recipient lists 139  
sending documents 137  
settings 136  
Q
quality  
copy, improving 229  
copy, problem-solving 229  
settings 42  
default settings 17  
no-wait 39  
SMTP support 134  
ENWW  
Index 269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
separator page  
Windows 101  
service  
HP-Authorized Dealers 246  
Service menu, control panel 46  
Services tab  
network installation,  
Macintosh 61, 62  
settings 52, 64  
supported operating  
systems 48, 60  
uninstalling Macintosh 65  
Windows 47  
Macintosh services tab 69  
messages, types of 192  
Status button 12  
Stop button 12  
stopping a print request 109  
storage, job  
Macintosh 69  
accessing 113  
settings  
Solaris software 58  
special media  
guidelines 84  
special paper  
features 113  
Macintosh settings 63, 69  
personal 114  
proof and hold 114  
QuickCopy 115  
Default Job Options menu 17  
driver presets (Macintosh) 66  
drivers 53, 64  
priority 52, 64  
guidelines 84  
Settings tab, embedded Web  
server 153  
specifications  
settings 25  
stored 116  
acoustic 252  
shortcuts 100  
electrical 251  
store jobs  
size, copy  
media 79  
Windows 102  
problem-solving 232  
size, media  
operating environment 180,  
physical 250  
stored jobs 116  
streaks, problem-solving 229  
subnet mask 75  
A4 settings 40  
default, selecting 22  
skewed pages 223  
Sleep button 12  
Sleep mode  
power specifications 251  
settings 23, 25  
sleep settings  
specks, problem-solving 219,  
supplies  
management menu 25  
ordering 240, 241  
ordering through embedded  
Web server 154  
speed dial list, printing 151  
spots, problem-solving 219, 225  
staple cartridges  
empty, stop or continue  
settings 105  
recycling 256  
Resets menu 46  
status page, printing 150  
status, viewing with embedded  
Web server 153  
delay 186  
sleep time 186  
wake time 186  
loading 105  
staple options  
Macintosh 68  
sleep time, setting 24, 186  
smeared toner, problem-  
solving 221  
Windows 101  
stapler  
default settings 18  
stapler/stacker  
status, viewing with HP Printer  
Utility 63  
supplies, status  
HP Easy Printer Care 156  
supply-status, Services tab  
Macintosh 69  
SMTP servers  
configuring gateway  
address 134  
empty, stop or continue  
settings 105  
connecting to 134  
testing 135  
validating gateway  
addresses 233  
software  
loading staples 105  
selecting output location 95  
staple jams, clearing 208  
stapling 104  
Windows 102  
support  
embedded Web server  
links 154  
HP Printer Utility pages 63  
stapling 104  
direct connection installation,  
Macintosh 60, 61  
embedded Web server 56,  
Start button 12  
Start button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
status  
supported media 81  
system requirements  
embedded Web server 152  
HP Easy Printer Care 56,  
HP Printer Utility 63  
HP Web Jetadmin 56  
Macintosh 60  
embedded Web server 153  
Home screen, control  
panel 13  
HP Easy Printer Care 156  
HP Printer Utility,  
Macintosh 63  
T
Taiwan EMI statement 261  
TCP/IP settings 26  
technical support  
online 246  
270 Index  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
temperature  
requirements 180  
temperature specifications 252  
tests  
jams, clearing 198  
locating  
trays  
capacities  
V
validating gateway  
addresses 233  
vertical transfer door  
networks 29  
configure 92  
locating  
text, problem-solving  
blurred 226  
default settings 38  
double-sided printing 68  
feeding problems, solving 231  
vertical white or faded  
stripes 229  
voltage specifications 251  
voltage, troubleshooting 191  
blurry 229  
dropouts 219  
included  
misformed characters 223  
time zone 23  
time, setting 23, 169  
Time/Scheduling menu, control  
panel 23  
timeout settings 26, 38  
tire tracks, problem-solving 225  
toner  
jams, clearing 196  
Macintosh settings 63  
registration, setting 42  
W
wake time, setting 23, 186  
Warning button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
trays, status  
HP Easy Printer Care 156  
troubleshooting  
warranty  
Customer self repair 244  
print cartridge 245  
product 243  
checklist 190  
control panel 191  
control panel messages,  
numerical 193  
digital sending 191  
duplexing 216  
EPS files 237  
gateway addresses 233  
Macintosh problems 236  
media handling problems 213  
network printing 234  
output quality 217  
transparencies 215  
adhesion problems,  
solving 230  
transfer unit and fuser 245  
watermarks  
density setting 63  
Economode 42  
loose, problem-solving 221  
smeared, problem-  
solving 221  
Windows 101  
wavy paper, problem-solving 224  
Web browser requirements  
embedded Web server 152  
Web sites  
transfer unit warranty 245  
tray 1  
customer support 246  
firmware updates  
HP Web Jetadmin,  
capacity  
fuser levers 111, 112  
jam locations 194  
jams, clearing 196  
loading envelopes 110  
loading paper 85  
downloading 159  
Macintosh customer  
support 247  
Material Safety Data Sheet  
(MSDS) 259  
TrueType fonts included  
two-sided copying  
default settings 17  
two-sided printing  
blank pages, default  
settings 38  
locating  
tray 2  
jams, clearing 196  
tray 2 or 3  
capacity  
ordering supplies 240  
universal print driver 50  
white lines or spots, problem-  
solving 225  
white or faded stripes 229  
Windows  
default settings 22  
Macintosh settings 63  
Windows 101  
custom media, loading 89  
jam locations 194  
U
driver settings 53  
drivers supported 49  
supported operating  
systems 48  
jams, clearing 198  
loading detectable standard-  
size paper 86  
loading undetectable standard-  
size paper 88  
uninstalling Macintosh  
software 65  
universal print driver 50  
UNIX software 58  
usage page, printing 150  
USB configuration 72  
USB port  
universal print driver 50  
Windows 2000 fax 148  
workflow, send to 143  
wrinkled paper, problem-  
solving 224  
locating  
tray 3  
jams, clearing 196  
tray 4  
capacity  
Macintosh installation 60, 61  
troubleshooting  
Macintosh 237  
ENWW  
Index 271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
272 Index  
ENWW  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Grizzly Router T10222 User Manual
HANNspree Flat Panel Television ST59 23A1 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Sander 41213 User Manual
Harmar Mobility Personal Lift 650 User Manual
Hasbro Games Gerald the Giraffe User Manual
Honeywell Humidifier HCM 630 Series User Manual
Hotpoint Oven 6142 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Stereo System HP 8671B User Manual
Hughes Modem ThurayaIP User Manual
Husqvarna Trimmer 500HD 56EL User Manual